FF230001

Owner’s Manual

BL00005235-200 EN
 Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents be-
fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.

For the Latest Information

The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website can be accessed not only from

your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

ii
P Chapter Index
Menu List iv

1 Before You Begin 1

2 First Steps 39

3 Basic Photography and Playback 59

4 Movie Recording and Playback 67

5 Taking Photographs 75

6 The Shooting Menus 125

7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213

8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241

9 The Setup Menus 331

10 Shortcuts 375

11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393

12 Technical Notes 419

iii
 Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.

Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
Menu List

N See page 125 for details.

Photo Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P

IMAGE SIZE 126 HIGH ISO NR 140
IMAGE QUALITY 127 CLARITY 141
RAW RECORDING 128 LONG EXPOSURE NR 141
SELECT JPEG/HEIF 129 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 141
1⁄4 3⁄4
FILM SIMULATION 130 COLOR SPACE 141
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 132 xF PIXEL MAPPING 142
GRAIN EFFECT 132 x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 142
COLOR CHROME EFFECT 133 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 142
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 133 4⁄4 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 143
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT 133
DYNAMIC RANGE 134
D RANGE PRIORITY 135
2⁄4
WHITE BALANCE 136
TONE CURVE 140
COLOR 140
SHARPNESS 140

iv
 Menu List

G AF/MF SETTING P A SHOOTING SETTING P

FOCUS AREA 146 SELF-TIMER 164
AF MODE 146 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 165
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING 146 SELF-TIMER LAMP 165
AF MODE ALL SETTING 146 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 166
1⁄3
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 147 1⁄3 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 168

Menu List
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 150 EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
AF POINT DISPLAYyz 151 INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE 168
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT 151 AE BKT SETTING 169
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 151 FILM SIMULATION BKT 169
PRE-AF 152 FOCUS BKT SETTING 169
xF AF ILLUMINATOR 152 PHOTOMETRY 169
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 153 SHUTTER TYPE 170
2⁄3 SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING 155 2⁄3 FLICKER REDUCTION 171
AF+MF 157 FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 171
MF ASSIST 158 ISO 171
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & IS MODE 172
158 35mm FORMAT MODE 172
FOCUS RING
FOCUS CHECK 159 xF COOLING FAN SETTING 173
3⁄3
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 159 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 173
xF INSTANT AF SETTING 159 F FLASH SETTING P
3⁄3 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 160 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 174
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 160 RED EYE REMOVAL 174
xF AF RANGE LIMITER 161 TTL-LOCK MODE 175
TOUCH SCREEN MODE 162 LED LIGHT SETTING 175
COMMANDER SETTING 176
CH SETTING 176

v
 Movie Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

B MOVIE SETTING P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P

Menu List

MOVIE SETTING LIST 177 F FILM SIMULATION 194

IMAGE FORMAT 177 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 194
MOVIE MODE 178 F DYNAMIC RANGE 195
HIGH SPEED REC 179 F WHITE BALANCE 195
1⁄4
F SELF-TIMER 180 1⁄2 F TONE CURVE 195
MEDIA REC SETTING 181 F COLOR 195
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING 184 F SHARPNESS 196
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION 185 F HIGH ISO NR 196
F-Log/HLG RECORDING 186 INTERFRAME NR 196
DATA LEVEL SETTING 187 xF PIXEL MAPPING 196
F PHOTOMETRY 187 2⁄2 F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY 197
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 187 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 197
2⁄4
F IS MODE 188 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 197
F IS MODE BOOST 188
F ISO 189
ZEBRA SETTING 189
ZEBRA LEVEL 189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR 191
3⁄4 TALLY LIGHT 192
xF COOLING FAN SETTING 193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM 193
SETTING
4⁄4 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 193

vi
 Menu List

G AF/MF SETTING P P AUDIO SETTING P

F FOCUS AREA 198 INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 205
F AF MODE 198 EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUST- 205
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 199 MENT
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT 199 MIC JACK SETTING 206
1⁄2 MIC LEVEL LIMITER 206
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR 200

Menu List
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION WIND FILTER 206
200 LOW CUT FILTER 207
SETTING
F SUBJECT DETECTION HEADPHONES VOLUME 207
200
SETTING MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 207
F AF+MF 201 2⁄2 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING 208
F MF ASSIST 201 Q TIME CODE SETTING P
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & 201 TIME CODE DISPLAY 209
FOCUS RING
START TIME SETTING 209
F FOCUS CHECK 202
COUNT UP SETTING 210
2⁄2 xF INSTANT AF SETTING 202 DROP FRAME 210
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 202 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 211
xF AF RANGE LIMITER 202 TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING 211
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE 203
FOCUS CHECK LOCK 204

vii
 The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N See page 220 for details.
C PLAY BACK MENU P C PLAY BACK MENU P
Menu List

SWITCH SLOT 220 IMAGE ROTATE 229

RAW CONVERSION 221 VOICE MEMO SETTING 230
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION 223 RATING 231
ERASE 224 COPY 232
1⁄3 2⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE 226 TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 233
CROP 226 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 235
RESIZE 227 DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK 235
PROTECT 228 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 236
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 238
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT 239
DISP ASPECT 240

viii
 Menu List

Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N See page 331 for details.
D USER SETTING P D SOUND SETTING P

Menu List
FORMAT 332 AF BEEP VOL. 338
b AREA SETTING 333 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 338
DATE/TIME 333 OPERATION VOL. 339
TIME DIFFERENCE 334 F REC START/STOP VOLUME 339
1⁄2
Qa 335 1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER 339
x MY MENU SETTING 335 VOLUME
F MY MENU SETTING 335 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER 340
SENSOR CLEANING 336 SOUND
BATTERY AGE 336 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 340
2⁄2 RESET 337 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 340
REGULATORY 337 2⁄2 PLAYBACK VOLUME 341
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 341

ix
 D SCREEN SETTING P D SCREEN SETTING P
VIEW MODE SETTING 342 LOCATION INFO 353
EVF BRIGHTNESS 342 SUB MONITOR SETTING 353
EVF COLOR 342 4⁄4 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 356
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 343 x Q MENU BACKGROUND 356
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS 344 F Q MENU BACKGROUND 356
Menu List

LCD COLOR 344

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 344
IMAGE DISP. 345
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW 346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST 347
2⁄4
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 347
FRAMING GUIDELINE 347
AUTOROTATE PB 348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION 348
FOCUS SCALE UNITS 348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 349
3⁄4
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 352

x
 Menu List

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING P D POWER MANAGEMENT P

FOCUS LEVER SETTING 357 AUTO POWER OFF 366
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU 357 PERFORMANCE 367
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU 357 SHOOTING STAND BY MODE 368
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 358 AUTO POWER SAVE 368
1⁄3
COMMAND DIAL SETTING 358 AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. 368

Menu List
o S.S. OPERATION 359 D SAVE DATA SETTING P
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION 359 FRAME NO. 369
SHUTTER AF 359 EDIT FILE NAME 370
SHUTTER AE 360 x CARD SLOT SETTING 370
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS 360 SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) 370
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD 360 1⁄2
SELECT FOLDER 371
FOCUS RING 361 COPYRIGHT INFO 371
2⁄3
FOCUS RING OPERATION 361 DEFAULT CAPTION 372
AE/AF-LOCK MODE 361 IPTC 372
AWB-LOCK MODE 362 2⁄2 GEOTAGGING 373
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING 362
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING 363
3⁄3 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 364
LOCK 365

xi
 The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
I NETWORK/USB SETTING P
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 318
AIRPLANE MODE 319
Menu List

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 320

1⁄2 instax PRINTER CONNECTION 323
SETTING
Frame.io Camera to Cloud 323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING 326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM 328
SETTING
INFORMATION 329
2⁄2
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING 329

xii
P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ........................................................................xii
Supplied Accessories ..................................................................................xxvii
About This Manual......................................................................................xxviii
Symbols and Conventions .................................................................................xxviii
Terminology ................................................................................................................xxviii

1 Before You Begin 1

Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable).....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................6
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................7
The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch ...............................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................8
The Command Dials.......................................................................................................9
The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 10
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 11
The Viewfinder .................................................................................................. 12
Attaching the Viewfinder ......................................................................................... 13
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 14
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 15
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 16
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 16
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 18
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 20
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 22
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 22
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 22

xiii
 The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 24
Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 25
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 27
The Secondary LCD Monitor .................................................................................. 28
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 32
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 32
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 33
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 34
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 34
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 38

2 First Steps 39
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 40
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 41
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 43
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 45
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 47
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 48
Using an external SSD in place of a memory card ................................... 49
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 50
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 54
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 55
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 56
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 58
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 58

3 Basic Photography and Playback 59

Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 60
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 63
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 64
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 66

4 Movie Recording and Playback 67

Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 68
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 72
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 73

xiv
 Table of Contents

5 Taking Photographs 75
P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 76
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 76
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 78
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 80
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 82
Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 86
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 92
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 93
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 95
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 97
Manual Focus...................................................................................................101
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 103
Sensitivity..........................................................................................................106
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 107
Metering ............................................................................................................108
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................109
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................110
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................112
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 113
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 113
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 114
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................117
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................119
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot ....................................................................................121

6 The Shooting Menus 125

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132

xv
 COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 133
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 134
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 135
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 136
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 140
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 140
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 140
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 141
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 141
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 142
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 142
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................................... 146
AF MODE ALL SETTING .......................................................................................... 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 150
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 151
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .......................................................... 158
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 159

xvi
 Table of Contents

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 159

xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 160
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................164
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 164
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 165
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 165
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 166
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 168
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 168
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 169
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 169
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 169
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 169
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 170
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 171
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 171
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 171
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 172
35mm FORMAT MODE ........................................................................................... 172
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 173
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................174
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 174
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 174
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 175
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 175
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 176
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 176
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................177
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 177
IMAGE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178

xvii
 HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 179
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 180
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 181
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 184
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 185
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 186
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 187
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 187
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 187
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 188
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 188
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 189
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 189
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE ................................................................................ 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 191
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 192
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 193
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 193
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................194
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 194
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 195
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 195
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 195
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 195
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 196
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 196
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 196
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 196
F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY ................................................................................... 197
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 197
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 197

xviii
 Table of Contents

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................198

F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 198
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 198
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 199
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 199
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 200
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 200
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 200
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 201
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 201
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ................................................... 201
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 202
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 202
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 202
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 202
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 203
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 204
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................205
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 205
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 205
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 206
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 206
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 206
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 207
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 207
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 207
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 208
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................209
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 209
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 209
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 210
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 210
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 211
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING .................................................................................. 211

xix
 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213
The Playback Display ....................................................................................214
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 216
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................218
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 219
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 219
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................220
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 220
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 221
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 223
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 224
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 226
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 226
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 227
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 228
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 229
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 230
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 231
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 232
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 233
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 235
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK ........................................................................ 235
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 236
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 238
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 239
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 240

8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241

Overview ...........................................................................................................242
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 242
Connection Setting Profiles................................................................................. 246

xx
 Table of Contents

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................247

Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 247
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 247
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 249
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259
Tethered Photography .................................................................................260
Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 262
Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)................................... 267
Uploading Files to Frame.io........................................................................270
Connecting via Wireless LAN .............................................................................. 270
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) ........................................................... 272
Uploading Items to Frame.io .............................................................................. 275
Uploading Files via FTP ................................................................................278
Connecting to FTP Servers................................................................................... 278
Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers ................................ 285
Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers .................................................................. 288
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................291
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................292
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser ................................293
Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser ................................... 293
Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet .................... 303
The Remote Recording Display......................................................................... 306
Recording Movies Remotely ............................................................................... 310
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................... 310
Saving and Loading Camera Settings ........................................................... 311

xxi
 Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................313
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING............................................................ 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING ........................................................................ 318
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 319
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 320
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 323
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING......................................................................................... 326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 328
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 329
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING ........................................................................ 329

9 The Setup Menus 331

USER SETTING .................................................................................................332
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 332
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 333
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 333
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 334
Qa ............................................................................................................... 335
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 335
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 335
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 336
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 336
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 337
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 337
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................338
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 338
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 338
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 339
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 340
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 341
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 341

xxii
 Table of Contents

SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................342

VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 342
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 343
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 344
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 344
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 344
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 345
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 347
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 347
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 347
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION ................................................................................ 348
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION ................................................................ 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 349
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 352
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 356
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................357
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 357
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 358
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 358

xxiii
 o S.S. OPERATION ................................................................................................... 359
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 359
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 359
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 360
FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................. 361
FOCUS RING OPERATION ...................................................................................... 361
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 361
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 362
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING ........................................................................ 362
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 363
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 364
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 365
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................366
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 366
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 367
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE .............................................................................. 368
AUTO POWER SAVE ................................................................................................... 368
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 368
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................369
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 369
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 370
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 370
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 370
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 371
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 371
DEFAULT CAPTION..................................................................................................... 372
IPTC ..................................................................................................................................... 372
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 373

xxiv
 Table of Contents

10Shortcuts 375
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................376
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................377
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 377
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................379
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 379
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 381
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 382
Function Controls...........................................................................................385
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 385
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 390

11Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393

Lenses.................................................................................................................394
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 394
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 395
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 395
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 395
Aperture Rings ............................................................................................................. 396
T/S Lenses ....................................................................................................................... 396
Viewfinder Tilt Adapters ..............................................................................397
Attaching the EVF-TL1............................................................................................. 398
Using the EVF-TL1 ...................................................................................................... 399
External Flash Units .......................................................................................400
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 401
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 402
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 403
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 406
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................410
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 411
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 413
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 415
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................416
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 416
Using the Fan................................................................................................................ 418

xxv
 Table of Contents

12Technical Notes 419

Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................420
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera...............................423
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 423
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 423
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 424
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 424
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 424
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 424
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 425
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 425
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 425
For Your Safety ................................................................................................426
Product Care ....................................................................................................437
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................438
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................439
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 439
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................440
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................452
Errors...................................................................................................................457
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................460
Specifications ..................................................................................................461

xxvi
 Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
• NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 50).

• AC-5VJ AC power adapter

• Plug adapter
• Interchangeable electronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3
• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)
• Body cap (comes attached to camera)
• Shoulder strap
• Cable protector
• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
• Vertical battery grip connector cover (comes attached to
camera)
• Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)
O The EVF-GFX3 is for the GFX100 II only.
N • The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 423).

xxvii
 About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX100 II
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.

Symbols and Conventions

The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
N Additional information that may be helpful when using the
product.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.

Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “mem-
ory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the
“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.

xxviii
Before You Begin

1
 Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

A Secondary monitor backlight button.......31 P Fn6 button .....................................................385

B Fn4 button .....................................................385 Q Fn5 button .....................................................385
C Secondary LCD monitor................................28 R Front command dial...............................9, 358
D Microphone ......................................................68 S ON/OFF switch .................................................54
E Hot shoe .........................................................401 T Shutter button .................................................62
F Dial lock release .......................................60, 68 U Fn1 button .....................................................385
G Mode dial ............................................................7 V Fn2 button .....................................................385
H STILL/MOVIE mode switch W Fn3 button .....................................................385
.............................................................. 8, 60, 68 X Hot shoe cover ..............................................401
I Strap eyelet .......................................................40 Y Body cap............................................................41
J LAN connector cover Z LAN connector
K Connector cover a Microphone/remote release connector
L AF-assist illuminator...................................152 (⌀3.5mm) ...............................................71, 85
Self-timer lamp ............................................164 b HDMI connector (Type A) .............................64
Tally light ........................................................192 c USB connector (Type-C) ...............................50
M Sync terminal ................................................402 d Hole to screw USB cable
N Lens signal contacts e Hole to screw cable protector
O Lens release button ........................................41

O a Use of an optional RR-100 remote release requires a third-party

adapter to convert the three-pin, ⌀2.5 mm connector to a three-
pin, ⌀3.5 mm connector.

2
 Parts of the Camera

Before You Begin

f DRIVE button......................................................8 t a (playback) button ...................................63
g b (delete) button ...........................................66 u Speaker .................................................... 73, 341
h Focus mode selector ......................................93 v MENU/OK button .............................................32
i AFON button .........................................111, 385 w AEL (exposure lock) button ..............111, 385
j Rear command dial .......................9, 218, 358 x Focus stick (focus lever)...................6, 98, 357
k Q (quick menu) button ...............................379 y Tripod mount
l Indicator lamp ....................................... 10, 192 z Vertical battery grip connector cover ....411
Tally light ........................................................192 0 Tilt lock release ................................................11
m Headphone jack cover 1 LCD monitor .......................................11, 18, 20
n Memory card slot cover latch......................45 Touch screen .................................34, 162, 203
o Memory card slot cover (detachable) 2 Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................207
..................................................................... 6, 45 3 Memory card slot 1
p Battery-chamber cover latch ......................43 (for Type B CFexpress cards)......................45
q Hole to hook Vertical Battery Grip 4 Memory card slot 2
r Battery-chamber cover .................................43 (for SD memory cards) ...............................45
s DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 22, 216

3
 1
Before You Begin

5 Battery latch ....................................................44 9 Hole to screw cooling fan..........................416

6 Battery chamber .............................................43 - Serial number plate..........................................6
7 Cooling fan connector cover ....................416 ^ Vertical battery grip connector................411
8 Cooling fan connector ...............................416

4
 Parts of the Camera

The Cable Protector

Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover
passes through the slot in the protector.
B Tighten the lock screw.
C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.

Before You Begin

5
 The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIIT ID, serial num-
ber, and other important information.

1 Serial number plate

Before You Begin

The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)

The memory card slot cover can be re-
moved by lowering the interior latch. Re-
move the cover for ease of access when
a camera rig is attached or in other sit-
uations that make it difficult to open or
close the cover.

The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)

Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-
cus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.

N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-
ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.

6
 Parts of the Camera

The Mode Dial

To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with the
index.

Before You Begin

Mode Description P
A P (PROGRAM AE) Aperture and shutter speed can be ad-
76
justed using program shift.
B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE) Select for full control over camera set- 78
A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE) tings, including aperture (M and A) 80
M (MANUAL) and/or shutter speed (M and S). 82
C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6 Take pictures using previously-stored
86
(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6) settings.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

7
 The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL
to take photographs or to MOVIE to record
movies.

1
The DRIVE Button
Before You Begin

Press the DRIVE button to adjust shooting settings. The options

displayed vary with the position of the STILL/MOVIE mode switch.
• Pressing the button when STILL is select-
ed displays drive mode options.

Mode P Mode P
B Single frame 76 j Multiple exposure 119
J High-speed burst 117 PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
q 121
O Low-speed burst 117 ACCURATE COLOR
W ISO BKT 113 PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
V WHITE BALANCE BKT 113 r HIGH RESOLUTION + 121
BKT Bracketing 114 ACCURATE COLOR

• Pressing the button when MOVIE is selected displays movie re-

cording options.
Option
Frame size
Aspect ratio
Frame rate

8
 Parts of the Camera

The Command Dials

Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial Rear command dial

1
• Highlight menu items

Before You Begin

• Choose the desired combina-
tion of shutter speed and aper-
ture (program shift)
• Choose a shutter speed 1, 4
• Select menu tabs or page • Adjust exposure compensation
through menus by rotating the dial while press-
• Adjust aperture 1, 2
ing the function button to which
• View other pictures during EXPO. COMP. is assigned 1
playback • Adjust settings in the quick menu
Rotate • Choose the size of the focus frame
• Zoom in or out in full frame play-
back
• Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback
• Switch between aperture and
ISO sensitivity 2 • Zoom in on the active focus point 3

• Press and hold to choose the op- • Press and hold to choose the
tion selected for D BUTTON/ manual focus mode focus display 3

Press
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND • Zoom in on the active focus
DIAL SETTING in the D (setup) point during playback
menu
1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the aperture ring
must be in the A or C position.
3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
4 Only if a value other than auto is selected for shutter speed.
N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.

9
 The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.

1
Indicator lamp Camera status
Before You Begin

Glows green Focus locked.

Blinks green Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con-
firmation after being taken with option other than OFF
Blinks green and
selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE DISP. (ad-
orange
ditional pictures can be taken).
• Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
Glows orange
this time.
Blinks orange Flash charging; flash will not fire when picture is taken.
Blinks red Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-
cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

10
 Parts of the Camera

The LCD Monitor

The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-
ier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap fingers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.
1

Before You Begin

N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
• Touch photography (P 35)
• Focus area selection (P 34)
• Function selection (P 37)
• Movie optimized control oL (P 36)
• Playback (P 38)
“Tall” (Portrait) Orientation
The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when
the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
• Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1.
• To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in
Figure 2.

Figure 1 Figure 2

11
 The Viewfinder

1
Before You Begin

A Hot shoe .................................................397, 403 G Diopter adjustment control ........................ 15

B Viewfinder lock releases ............................... 13 H Serial number plate
C VIEW MODE button......................................... 20 I Connectors ....................................................... 13
D Eye sensor ......................................................... 21 J Hot shoe cover
E Electronic viewfinder (EVF) ................... 16, 20 K Connector cover
F Eye cup (lockable) .......................................... 14
The EVF-TL1
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel
the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down
between 0° and 90° (P 397).

12
 The Viewfinder

Attaching the Viewfinder

Using the viewfinder makes it easier to
frame your subject accurately. Remove
the hot shoe cover from the camera and
slide the viewfinder onto the hot shoe,
stopping when it clicks into place.
1
Removing the Viewfinder
Keeping the lock releases pressed (A), press

Before You Begin

down on the front of the viewfinder (B) and
slide it off as shown.

13
 The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.

1
Before You Begin

14
 The Viewfinder

Focusing the Viewfinder

If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your
eye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus. 1
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.

Before You Begin

O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.

15
 Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder
1
C D QR UV Y Z e f
Before You Begin

F E F G N O P ST WX b c d
E

D HI J KLM 2023.12.31
a 12:10 g
h
G i
C
B j
A
9
k
8 l
m

7
6 n

5 zy v ut s r q po
4
3 21 0 x w

A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 C Movie compression .....................................182

B IS mode 2 .........................................................172 D Focus check ..........................................104, 159

16
 Camera Displays

E Depth-of-field preview........................ 81, 103 k Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193

F Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 l Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456
G 35mm format mode ...................................172 m Control lock 3 .................................................365
H Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403 n Boost mode ...................................................367
I Flash compensation ...................................403 o Power supply....................................................52
J Self-timer indicator .....................................164 p Histogram .........................................................26
K Continuous mode........................................117 q Battery level ......................................................55
L Shutter type ...................................................170 r Sensitivity .......................................................106
M AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157 s Exposure compensation ............................109 1
N Bluetooth ON/OFF t Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
O Wireless connection u Distance indicator 2 .....................................103

Before You Begin

P Ethernet connection v Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
Q White balance ..............................................136 w TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
R AWB lock ........................................................362 x AE lock....................................................111, 361
S Film simulation ............................................130 y Metering .........................................................108
T F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 z Shooting mode ...............................................76
U Dynamic range ............................................134 0 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93
V D-range priority ...........................................135 1 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94
W Bluetooth host ..............................................247 2 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101
X AirGlu BT connection ..................................211 3 AF lock....................................................111, 361
Y Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178 4 Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
Z High-speed recording indicator ..............179 5 Time code.......................................................209
a Recording time available/ 6 Microphone input channel.......................208
elapsed recording time ..............................68 7 Recording level 2 ...........................................205
b Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 8 Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109
c SSD connection status ..................................49 9 Virtual horizon.................................................27
d Number of available frames 1...................460 A Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110
e Image size ......................................................126 B Location data download status..............373
f File format......................................................182 C Frame.io connection status ......................274
g Image quality................................................127 D Image transfer status ........................247, 313
h HEIF format ...................................................129 E FTP upload progress ...................................278
i Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 F Frame.io upload progress..........................270
j Touch screen mode .............................. 34, 162 G Remote recording function .......................293
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

17
 The LCD Monitor
E F M N U V W

B C D G H I JK O P Q Y Z

A L R S T X a b
1
70
'
Before You Begin

' c
&
d
%
$ e
\ f
^ g
-
h
i
9 j
k
l
8 m
7 n
6
1 0 x ut s r q p o

5 4 3 2 zy w v

A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 I 35mm format mode ...................................172

B Bluetooth ON/OFF J Bluetooth host ..............................................247
C Wireless connection K AirGlu BT connection ..................................211
D Ethernet connection L Location data download status..............373
E Movie compression .....................................182 M Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178
F Focus check ..........................................104, 159 N High-speed recording indicator ..............179
G Depth-of-field preview........................ 81, 103 O Image transfer status ........................247, 313
H Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 P FTP upload progress ...................................278

18
 Camera Displays

Q Frame.io upload progress..........................270 r Virtual horizon.................................................27

R Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110 s Exposure compensation ............................109
S Recording time available/ t Distance indicator 2 .....................................103
elapsed recording time ..............................68 u Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
T Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 v Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
U Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 w Time code.......................................................209
V SSD connection status ..................................49 x Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
W Number of available frames 1...................460 y TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
X Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193 z AE lock....................................................111, 361 1
Y Image size ......................................................126 0 Metering .........................................................108
Z File format......................................................182 1 Shooting mode ...............................................76

Before You Begin

a Image quality................................................127 2 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93
b HEIF format ...................................................129 3 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94
c Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 34, 162 4 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101
d AWB lock ........................................................362 5 AF lock....................................................111, 361
e White balance ..............................................136 6 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157
f Film simulation ............................................130 7 Microphone input channel.......................208
g F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 8 Shutter type ...................................................170
h Dynamic range ............................................134 9 Recording level 2 ...........................................205
i D-range priority ...........................................135 A Continuous mode........................................117
j Movie optimized control 3 ............................36 B Self-timer indicator .....................................164
k Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456 C Remote recording function .......................293
l Control lock 4 .................................................365 D Frame.io connection status ......................274
m Boost mode ...................................................367 E Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109
n Power supply....................................................52 F Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403
o Battery level ......................................................55 G Flash compensation ...................................403
p Histogram .........................................................26 H IS mode 2 .........................................................172
q Sensitivity .......................................................106
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

19
 Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.

1
N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to
choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
Before You Begin

SHOOTING

Option Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
E EYE SENSOR on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
EVF ONLY + E on; taking it away turns the viewfinder off. The LCD
monitor remains off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder during shooting
turns the viewfinder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
the display of images once you remove your eye from
E EYE SENSOR + LCD
the viewfinder after shooting. The options selected for
IMAGE DISP.
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected
while shooting movies.

N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING > SHOOTING in

the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes
available.

20
 Camera Displays

PLAYBACK

Option Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
E EYE SENSOR on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off. 1

Before You Begin

The Eye Sensor
• The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on
the sensor.
• The eye sensor is not available when the LCD
monitor is tilted.

Eye sensor

21
 Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
1
Display Rotation
Before You Begin

When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE

DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor au-
tomatically rotate to match camera orientation.

The DISP/BACK Button

The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.

N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose
the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while using the
DISP/BACK button.

22
 Camera Displays

Viewfinder
Full screen
Full screen
(no indicators)

Before You Begin

Standard indicators Standard (no indicators)

Dual display

N The dual display is available only when shooting still images with man-
ual focus.

23
 LCD Monitor
Standard indicators Standard (no indicators)

1
Before You Begin

Dual display Info display

N The dual display is available only during manual focus.

The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.

24
 Camera Displays

Customizing the Standard Display

To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators.

Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.

2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.

Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the 1
setup menu.

Before You Begin

3 Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
• FRAMING GUIDELINE • WHITE BALANCE
• FOCUS FRAME • FILM SIMULATION
• FOCUS INDICATOR • DYNAMIC RANGE
• AF DISTANCE INDICATOR • BOOST MODE
• MF DISTANCE INDICATOR • SHIFT AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
• HISTOGRAM • ROTATE AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
• LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT • COOLING FAN SETTING
• SHOOTING MODE • FRAMES REMAINING
• APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO • IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
• INFORMATION BACKGROUND • MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
• Expo. Comp. (Digit) • 35mm FORMAT MODE
• Expo. Comp. (Scale) • COMMUNICATION STATUS
• FOCUS MODE • MIC LEVEL
• PHOTOMETRY • GUIDANCE MESSAGE
• SHUTTER TYPE • NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING
• FLASH • DATE/TIME
• CONTINUOUS MODE • BATTERY LEVEL
• DUAL IS MODE • FRAMING OUTLINE
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes.

5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the

shooting display.

25
 Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.

1 Number of pixels
Before You Begin

Shadows Highlights
Pixel brightness

• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve

throughout the tone range.
• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.

To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-

play showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the func-
tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 358, 385).
A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms A B

26
 Camera Displays

Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-
sen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D 3D
1

Before You Begin

Pitch Roll
• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.

27
 The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Dif-
ferent settings are displayed in still pho-
tography and movie modes.
1
Secondary LCD monitor
Before You Begin

Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings list-
ed below.
N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
SUB MONITOR SETTING.
Still Photography Mode
A BC

D
K E
F
G

J I H
Default
A SHUTTER SPEED G FILM SIMULATION
B APERTURE H BATTERY LEVEL
C ISO I FRAMES REM.
D SHOOTING MODE J CARD SLOT OPTIONS
E IMAGE SIZE K d Scale
F WHITE BALANCE
N BATTERY LEVEL, FRAMES REM., and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot
be changed in the settings.
28
 Camera Displays

Movie Mode
ABC D

E
M
F 1

Before You Begin

L K JIH G

Default
A SHUTTER SPEED H FILM SIMULATION
B APERTURE I WHITE BALANCE
C ISO J MOVIE FORMAT
D MOVIE MODE K SHOOTING MODE
E BATTERY LEVEL L CARD SLOT OPTIONS
F REMAINING TIME M Expo.Comp. & MIC LEVEL
G TIME CODE

N MOVIE MODE, BATTERY LEVEL, and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot

be changed in the settings.

Checking the functions assigned to function buttons

The functions assigned to the Fn1, Fn2, and A B C
Fn3 buttons in D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can be checked on
the secondary LCD monitor.
A Fn1 button
B Fn2 button
C Fn3 button

29
 Cycling Through Indicators in the Secondary LCD Monitor
The indicators displayed in the second-
ary LCD monitor change each time the
secondary LCD monitor mode button is
pressed.

1
INFORMATION * DIALS
Before You Begin

HISTOGRAM

* Displays movie information in movie mode.

30
 Camera Displays

The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button

To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-
light when you find the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turn
the backlight off.

Background Color 1
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can

Before You Begin

be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND
COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-
played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.

31
 Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.

1
The Menus
Before You Begin

Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie

recording, and playback.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
STILL/MOVIE mode switch EXIT

set to STILL
Shooting
MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST

IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
SELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
STILL/MOVIE mode switch EXIT

set to MOVIE
PLAY BACK MENU

SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
Playback SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT
During playback

32
 Using the Menus

Selecting a Menu Tab

To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.

Before You Begin

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
to highlight the tab for the current IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
menu. SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

Tab

3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-

ing the desired item.

4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.
N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.

33
 Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.

Shooting Touch Controls

TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
1 SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN ON
TOUCH FUNCTION
TOUCH SCREENOFF
SETTING
SETTING. EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Before You Begin

EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-
tures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-
itor employed for touch controls.

N You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-
ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

34
 Touch Screen Mode

LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indica-
tor in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:

1
Mode Description

Before You Begin

• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
AF you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
AF OFF the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
AREA
move to the selected point.

OFF Touch screen mode off.

O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163).
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-
lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING >
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during mov-
ie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 203)”.

35
 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode but-
ton in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
1 movie recording. This can be used to pre-
vent camera sounds being recorded with Movie-optimized
Before You Begin

movie footage. mode button

• SHUTTER SPEED • WIND FILTER

• APERTURE • HEADPHONES VOLUME
• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION • F FILM SIMULATION
• F ISO • F WHITE BALANCE
• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL • F IS MODE
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC • F IS MODE BOOST
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.
• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode
button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-opti-
mized control.
• EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an external
mic is connected.

36
 Touch Screen Mode

Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the follow-
ing flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 385):
• Flick up: T-Fn1
• Flick left: T-Fn2
• Flick right: T-Fn3 1
• Flick down: T-Fn4

Before You Begin

N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges- INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
L R
tures display a menu; tap to select the 0
-6

desired option. -12

-20
25.5

-40
-50
dB

SET CANCEL

• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable

touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

37
 Touch Screen Mode

Playback Touch Controls

When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
view other images.
1
Before You Begin

• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display

and spread them apart to zoom in.

• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display

and slide them together to zoom out.

N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.

• Drag: View other areas of the image during

playback zoom.

38
First Steps

39
 Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.

2
First Steps

O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.

40
 Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (A), and then
slowly rotate the lens in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks into place (B). 2
O • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does

First Steps
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, then
press the lens release button (A) and slowly
rotate the lens as shown (B).

O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens

or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.

41
 Attaching a Lens

O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• Do not rotate the lens while holding moving parts of the camera,
such as the aperture ring.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
2
First Steps

42
 Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.

1 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the bat-
tery-chamber cover.
O • Do not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution could
2
damage image files or memory

First Steps
cards.
• Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.

2 Insert the battery as shown.

O • Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.

43
 Inserting the Battery

3 Close the battery-chamber cover.

Close and latch the cover.
O If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orienta-
tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-
er shut.

Removing the Battery

Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-cham-
2 ber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
First Steps

to the side, and slide the battery out of the

camera as shown.

O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery.

44
 Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.

1 Open the memory card slot cover.

Unlatch and open the cover.

First Steps
O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-
leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-
age the card.

2 Insert the memory card.

Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.

O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle

or use force.

45
 Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
finger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.

O • Press the center of the card.

• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
2 fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.
• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
First Steps

touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.

46
 Inserting Memory Cards

Using Two Cards

The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-
ond slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option Description Display
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the first slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
SEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL), 2
(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot and

First Steps
switch to the first slot when the card in the second slot
is full.

BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.

RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the first

slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the sec-
ond slot. This setting takes effect only when SUPER RAW+JPEG
SEPARATE
FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW, or NORMAL+RAW is se-
lected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE
QUALITY. RAW+HEIF

The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE

SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

47
 Compatible Memory Cards
• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
• CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for high-
speed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 72).
2 • A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
First Steps

O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a mem-
ory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-
era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-
puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.

48
 Inserting Memory Cards

Using an external SSD in place of a memory card

This camera can save still images and
movies to an SSD. If an SSD is connected
to the USB connector, an icon appears on
the screen, and the recording destination
is switched to the SSD automatically. To
record to a memory card, turn off the
camera, and then remove the SSD.
N Even when an SSD is connected, you can select the SSD or a memory 2
card for playback by C PLAY BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT.

First Steps

49
 Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-
ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.
O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2 1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
First Steps

place on the AC power adapter terminals.

O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.

2 Charge the battery.

Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.

O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).

• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.

50
 Charging the Battery

Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Charging error

First Steps

51
 O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
2 in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-
uct malfunction.
First Steps

• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.

N • If the camera is turned on during charging,

charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 328).
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.

52
 Charging the Battery

Charging via Computer

The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-
puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.

First Steps
Leave the computer on during charging.
O• The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-
puter, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.

53
 Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.

2 O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-
tures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinder
First Steps

clean.

N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.

54
 Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:

2
Indicator Description

First Steps
e Battery partially discharged.
f Battery about 80% full.
g Battery about 60% full.
h Battery about 40% full.
i Battery about 20% full.
i Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
(red)
j Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
(blinks red)

55
 Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the first time.

1 Turn the camera on.

A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
First Steps

2 Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.

3 Choose a time zone.

When prompted, choose a time zone AREA SETTING

and turn daylight savings time on

or off using the focus stick (focus le-
ver), then highlight SET and press BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING GMT ±0:00
MENU/OK. DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET
OFF

NO

N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.

56
 Basic Setup

4 Set the clock.

DATE/TIME
GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS

2023 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h

SET NO

5 View information on the smartphone app.

• The camera will display a QR code APPLICATION 2
you can scan with your smartphone IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED

First Steps
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
• Press MENU/OK to proceed to the
next step. SET

N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera

or control the camera remotely (P 247).

6 Choose an AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

• The selected setting determines AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

the temperature at which the cam-

STANDARD
era will turn off automatically. HIGH

• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot- SET THE "AUTO POWER OFF TEMP." TO "HIGH" TO EXTEND
THE RECORDING TIME. ONLY RECOMMENDED
ing display. WHEN NOT HANDHELD OR WHEN USING TRIPOD ETC.

SET

7 Format the memory card (P 332).

O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.

N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.

57
 Basic Setup

Choosing a Different Language

To change the language:

1 Display language options.

Select D USER SETTING > Qa.

2 Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Changing the Time and Date

2
To set the camera clock:
First Steps

1 Display DATE/TIME options.

Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.

2 Set the clock.

Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

58
Basic Photography and
Playback

59
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 76–85 for information on S, A,
and M modes.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

STILL.

3
2 Rotate the focus mode selector to S.
Basic Photography and Playback

3 Rotate the mode dial to P.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
release the dial.

4 Confirm that P appears in the display.

60
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)

5 Ready the camera.

• Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or un-
steady hands can blur your shots.

• To prevent pictures that are out of

focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator. 3

Basic Photography and Playback

6 Frame the picture.
Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.

61
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)

7 Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.

Focus indicator
Focus frame
• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
3 • If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
Basic Photography and Playback

N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to

assist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is
kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.

8 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.

62
 Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001

Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo- 3

cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press

Basic Photography and Playback

the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.
N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.

63
 HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.

Connecting to HDMI Devices

Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.

1 Turn the camera off.

2 Connect the cable as shown below.

3
Insert into
Basic Photography and Playback

HDMI connector

Insert into HDMI

connector (Type A)

3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-

umentation supplied with the device.

4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 65).
O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.

64
 Viewing Pictures

Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an exter-
nal recorder that supports HDMI input.

Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-
itor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.
N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie play- 3
back begins.

Basic Photography and Playback

65
 Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.

1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and

select FRAME.
ERASE

FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES

3
Basic Photography and Playback

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 228).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU > ERASE option (P 224).

66
Movie Recording and
Playback

67
 Recording Movies
This section describes how to film movies in auto mode.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

MOVIE.

2 Rotate the mode dial to P.

4
Movie Recording and Playback

AUTO will appear in the display.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

68
 Recording Movies

3 Press the shutter button all the way

down.
Recording will start.
• A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
• The borders of the display turn Recording time
red during movie recording, green Time remaining
during high-speed recording.
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.

4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends

automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full. 4
O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external

Movie Recording and Playback

microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

69
 N • To maximize recording time:
- keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and
- turn the camera off any time it is not in use.
• The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• To prevent the borders of the display changing color during mov-
ie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING > F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
• While recording is in progress, you can:
- Adjust sensitivity
- Refocus using any of the following methods:
4 • Press the shutter button halfway
• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
Movie Recording and Playback

• Use touch screen controls

- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-
signed
• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 97).

70
 Recording Movies

Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external micro-
phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.

XLR Microphone Adapters

The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
4
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website

Movie Recording and Playback

71
 Recording Movies

Adjusting Movie Settings

• Pressing MENU/OK when MOVIE is selected with the STILL/MOVIE
mode switch displays the movie menu.
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-
ing MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
• Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regard-
less of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
to focus mode C (continuous AF) when FACE DETECTION ON
or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING >
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING. Note, however, that choosing focus mode M when
4 FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected
disables face and subject detection.
Movie Recording and Playback

O • The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be ad-
justed when the mode dial is set to A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).

72
 Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
Any movie selected after the a button is
pressed to begin playback will be indicat-
ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) down to start movie playback. PLAY AUDIO SET.

+1.0 12800

The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

Movie Recording and Playback

Focus stick Playback in Playback
(focus lever) Full-frame playback x)
progress ((x (y)
paused (y
View photo
Up End playback
information
Down Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/
Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed
advance

Progress is shown in the display during

playback.

STOP PAUSE

73
 Viewing Movies

O Do not cover the speaker during playback.

N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press
the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the a button (P 64).
Playback Speed
29m59s
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to
adjust playback speed during playback. Speed
is shown by the number of arrows (M or N).

4
Arrows
Movie Recording and Playback

74
Taking Photographs

75
 P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.

Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

STILL.

5 2 Rotate the mode dial to P.

Taking Photographs

P will appear in the display.

O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.

76
 P, S, A, and M Modes

Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the front command
dial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure
(program shift).

Aperture
Shutter speed

O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:

• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING
• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >
DYNAMIC RANGE
• In movie mode
N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off. 5

Taking Photographs

77
 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to S.

5
Taking Photographs

S will appear in the display.

3 Rotate the rear command dial to

choose the shutter speed.

78
 P, S, A, and M Modes

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter

speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-
ture display will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
N • Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.

Taking Photographs

79
 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to A.

5
Taking Photographs

A will appear in the display.

3 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.

N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
• If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” po-
sition, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture
when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-
ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

80
 P, S, A, and M Modes

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,

shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button dis-
plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of field to be
previewed in the display.

Taking Photographs

81
 Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-
pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-
ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to

STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to M.

5
Taking Photographs

M will appear in the display.

82
 P, S, A, and M Modes

3 Rotate the rear command dial to

choose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose the aperture.

N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator

that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-ex-
posed at current settings.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
• If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” po-
sition, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture
when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-
ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
5
O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

Taking Photographs
BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is rec-
ommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.

1 Set shutter speed to BULB.

83
 2 Press the shutter button all the way down.
• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or multiple exposure or when the electronic shutter is selected
for A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this
may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

5
Taking Photographs

84
 P, S, A, and M Modes

Using a Remote Release

A remote release can be used for long time-ex-
posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-
mote release or an electronic release from
third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
microphone/remote release connector via a
third-party ⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter.

NA confirmation dialog will be displayed

when a remote release is connected; press
MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/ CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
SETTING
REMOTE RELEASE. SET SKIP

Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
5

Taking Photographs
N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the pic-
ture is taken.

85
 Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.

Saving Current Settings

Save current settings in a custom settings bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
5
2 Highlight a destination bank for cur- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

rent settings (C1 through C6) and

Taking Photographs

CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6

EXIT

3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS CUSTOM 1

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

EXIT

86
 P, S, A, and M Modes

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS

CUSTOM 1
Current settings will be saved to the SAVE THE CHANGES OK?

selected bank.
OK
CANCEL

Editing Custom Settings

Edit existing custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

5
tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2

Taking Photographs
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6

EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press CUSTOM 1

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

EXIT

87
 4 The camera will display a list of shoot- CUSTOM 1
SHOOTING MODE
ing menu items; highlight an item SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK. EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE
Adjust the selected item as desired.

EXIT

5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting

menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING, red dots will appear next to the edit-
ed items but the changes will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE
THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
5 settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied
Taking Photographs

with the changes intact.

Copying Custom Settings

Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-
named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

88
 P, S, A, and M Modes

2 Highlight the source bank and press EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6

EXIT

3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

EXIT

4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 COPY TO

CUSTOM 1
through C6) and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5

N Any changes to custom settings in the CUSTOM 6 5

destination bank will be overwritten.

Taking Photographs
5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. COPY
CUSTOM 1
The selected settings will be copied CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
OK
CANCEL

89
 Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.
To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the
movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1

CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6

EXIT

3 Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
5 and press MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. RESET THE CHANGES
Taking Photographs

COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

EXIT

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. RESET CUSTOM SETTING

CUSTOM 1
The selected bank will be reset. RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT

OK
CANCEL

90
 P, S, A, and M Modes

Renaming Custom Settings Banks

Rename selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photogra-
phy. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1

CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6

EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and CUSTOM 1

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
press MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK 5
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES

Taking Photographs
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

EXIT

4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.

91
 Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S

or C (P 93).

2 Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode

(P 95).
3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS
AREA and choose the position and
size of the focus frame (P 97).

5
Taking Photographs

4 Take pictures.

92
 Autofocus

Focus Mode
Use the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.

Choose from the following options:

Mode Description
S Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(AF-S) Choose for stationary subjects.
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reflect changes in the
C distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(AF-C)
Use for subjects that are in motion.
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual
M control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus
(manual)
using autofocus (P 101). 5
N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when

Taking Photographs
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.

93
 The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.

Focus indicator
Focus indicator Focus status
( ) Camera focusing.
z
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S).
(lights green)
(z) Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjust-
(lights green) ed for changes in distance to subject.
A
Camera unable to focus.
(blinks white)
j Manual focus (focus mode M).
5
Taking Photographs

94
 Autofocus

Autofocus Options (AF Mode)

Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.

2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.

3 Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Option Description Sample image

Camera focuses on subject in

r selected focus point. Use for pin-
SINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.
5

Taking Photographs
Camera focuses on subject in se-
lected focus zone. Focus zones in-
y clude multiple focus points, mak-
ZONE ing it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.

Camera focuses automatically on

z high-contrast subjects; display
WIDE shows areas in focus.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

j play (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
ALL G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

95
 Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Option Description Sample image

Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

r cus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.

Camera tracks focus in selected fo-

y cus zone. Use for subjects that are
ZONE moving fairly predictably.

5 z Focus tracks subjects moving

TRACKING through wide area of frame.
Taking Photographs

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

j play (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
ALL G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

96
 Autofocus

Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.

Viewing the Focus-Point Display

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.

2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display.

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 34).

Taking Photographs

97
 Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option se-
lected for AF mode.

Focus stick Rear command dial

AF mode

Tilt Press Rotate Press

r Choose from 6 Restore original

Select focus Select center frame sizes size
y point focus point
5
z —
Taking Photographs

N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING

is selected in focus mode S.
• You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to the
center.

98
 Autofocus

The Focus-Point Display

The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N • Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the
large squares.
• The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING > ZONE
CUSTOM SETTING.
AF mode
r SINGLE POINT y ZONE z WIDE/TRACKING

Number of points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame over 5
able can be selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track

Taking Photographs
G AF/MF SETTING > points or from ZONE using continuous AF.
NUMBER OF FOCUS CUSTOM 1, ZONE
POINTS. CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).

99
 Autofocus

Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear command
dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rear
command dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display Focus zoom

N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command

dial.
5 • The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in
effect.
Taking Photographs

• In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.

• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.
• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the rear command
dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 385).

100
 Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M.

j will appear in the display.

2 Focus manually using the lens focus 5

ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce

Taking Photographs
the focus distance, right to increase.

3 Take pictures.

N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-

tion of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.

101
 Quick Focus
• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-
sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs

102
 Manual Focus

Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.

The Manual Focus Indicator

The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-
cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)

Depth of field
5

Taking Photographs
N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-
of-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

103
 Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the
camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear com-
mand dial to exit zoom.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.

MF Assist

Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 158) in the photo

menus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 201) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.

5 N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photog-
raphy.
Taking Photographs

• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image

in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and ro-
tate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.

• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that

emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.

104
 Manual Focus

• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.

• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below

the focus point indicating whether fo-
cus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.
N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > FOCUS RING.

• FOCUS MAP: Square indicators are dis- 5

played in focus frames to indicate points

Taking Photographs
that are in focus and not in focus by color.
A green indicator is displayed on a point
in focus on the subject and a point the
same distance as the subject. A yellow
indicator is displayed on a point in front
of the focus position, and a blue indicator is displayed on a point
behind the focus position.
N • You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/
MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting,
a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus posi-
tion, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus
position.
• Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are difficult to cap-
ture with auto focus (P 99).

105
 Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Sensitivity settings can be displayed by pressing the Fn button to
which sensitivity is assigned.
Option Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shoot-
AUTO1 ing conditions according to combination of standard and
AUTO2 maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed cho-
AUTO3 sen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 107).
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis-
80–12800
play.
L (40) Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-
H (25600/51200/102400) pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.

5 N • Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off.

• If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND
Taking Photographs

DIAL SETTING to configure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be

adjusted using the front or rear command dial.

Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

106
 Sensitivity

AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Default
Item Options
AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 80–12800 80
MAX. SENSITIVITY 200–12800 800 1600 3200
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ¼–30 SEC, AUTO AUTO
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-
fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
5
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected

Taking Photographs
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will auto-
matically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image sta-
bilization is on or off ).

107
 Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of the
following metering options:
O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.

Mode Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an
o analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution.
MULTI
Recommended in most situations.
p The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
CENTER-
weight to the area at the center.
WEIGHTED
5 The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
v to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
Taking Photographs

SPOT
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
w consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same
AVERAGE lighting, and is particularly effective for landscapes and
portraits of subjects dressed in black or white.

N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159).

108
 Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Hold the Fn button to which exposure compensation is assigned
and rotate the rear command dial to select the desired value.
N The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.

• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:
- the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensa-
tion during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is select- 5
ed for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by

Taking Photographs
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.

109
 Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.

1 Position the subject in the focus

frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).

2 Press the button all the way down.

N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.

5
Taking Photographs

110
 Focus/Exposure Lock

Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-
fault settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo-
AEL button
cus without locking exposure.
(exposure lock)
• While the assigned control is pressed,
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second AFON button
time. 5

N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point

Taking Photographs
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 387).

111
 Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display

drive mode options.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight one

of the following:
Option P Option P
W ISO BKT 113 s Bracketing 114
V WHITE BALANCE BKT 113

5 3 Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired

bracketing settings.
Taking Photographs

4 Press MENU/OK to select.

5 Take pictures.

112
 Bracketing

W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take
a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with
sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.

V WHITE BALANCE BKT

Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode dis-
play. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot
and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white
balanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selected
amount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selected
amount.

Taking Photographs

113
 s Bracketing

O AE BKT
Use A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose the
bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or un-
der-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.
N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.

X FILM SIMULATION BKT

Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with different film simulation settings,
chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.
5 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
Taking Photographs

shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 320; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.

114
 Bracketing

Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-
ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING
SETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.
N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUAL
In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option Description
FRAMES Choose the number of shots.
STEP Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP 5
is shown in the illustration.

Taking Photographs
Step

Frames 1 2 3 4 5

Starting focus position

• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infinity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-
es infinity.

115
 Bracketing

AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP auto-
matically.

1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, high-

light FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.

The view through the lens will be displayed.

3 Focus on the nearest end of the sub- FOCUS BKT SETTING

SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
ject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.
SET POINT B SET

N The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest

5 end of the subject first.

4 Focus on the farthest end of the sub- FOCUS BKT SETTING

Taking Photographs

SET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
SET POINT A SET
focus distance indicator.

N Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK

and select A again.

5 Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in the
display. NO

116
 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display

drive mode options.

2 If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is

selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.
O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-
maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder. 5
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record

Taking Photographs
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

117
 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

Focus and Exposure

• Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > SHUTTER AE.

N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-

pensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.

5
Taking Photographs

118
 Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display

the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.

2 Choose a blend mode.

5
Option Description

Taking Photographs
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need
ADDITIVE to lower exposure compensation depending on the
number of shots.
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the
AVERAGE final picture. The background in series shot without
changing the composition will be optimally exposed.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
BRIGHT the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
DARK the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.

3 Take the first shot.

119
 Multiple Exposures

4 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be

shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.

NEXT
RETRY EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press the
focus stick (focus lever) left.
• To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-
sure, press DISP/BACK.

5 Take the second shot, using the first

frame as a guide.

EXIT

5
6 Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be dis-
Taking Photographs

played as a guide to composing the

next shot.

RETRY EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
• To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.

7 Make additional exposures.

Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.

8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.

The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-
posure shooting will end.

120
 Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot
The camera takes a series of 4 or 16 shots, using in-body
image stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pix-
el with each shot and recording each frame in RAW format.
Using specialized computer software, the frames can then
be combined to create a high-resolution RAW picture.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display

the drive mode options and se-
lect PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
ACCURATE COLOR or PIXEL SHIFT
MULTI SHOT HIGH RESOLUTION +
ACCURATE COLOR.
2 Choose a value for INTERVAL.
• We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
• If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a val- 5
ue for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge

Taking Photographs
between shots.

3 Press the shutter button to start shooting.

• The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
• To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote re-
lease.

4 Combine the shots on a computer.

• The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm, or
Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by
SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.

121
 N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the follow-
ing computer software:
- FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
- Capture One Express for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
- Capture One for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
- Capture One Pro:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features
• Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered
shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄5 s or
slower (14-bit RAW) or ½.5 s or slower (16-bit RAW).
• The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:
- Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using
the electronic shutter.
5 - Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher
values or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while
Taking Photographs

lower values remain unchanged.

- The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS
COMPRESSED.
- Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shot
in focus mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual)
selected are shot in the chosen focus mode.
- If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results
may not be achieved when the shots are combined.
- A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set
to OFF.
- The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 4 or 16
shots.

122
 Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot

Playback
Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot
option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot
icon in full-frame playback (P 214).

Taking Photographs

123
MEMO

124
The Shooting Menus

125
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
tab. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
Option Image size Option Image size
O4:3 11648 × 8736 O 65 : 24 11648 × 4304
O3:2 11648 × 7768 O5:4 10928 × 8736
O 16 : 9 11648 × 6552 O7:6 10192 × 8736
O1:1 8736 × 8736
6
Option Image size Option Image size
The Shooting Menus

P4:3 8256 × 6192 P 65 : 24 8256 × 3048

P3:2 8256 × 5504 P5:4 7744 × 6192
P 16 : 9 8256 × 4640 P7:6 7232 × 6192
P1:1 6192 × 6192

Option Image size Option Image size

Q4:3 4000 × 3000 Q 65 : 24 4000 × 1480
Q3:2 4000 × 2664 Q5:4 3744 × 3000
Q 16 : 9 4000 × 2248 Q7:6 3504 × 3000
Q1:1 2992 × 2992

N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another
shooting mode is selected.

126
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
Option Description
SUPER FINE Very low compression ratios are used for maximum image quality.
FINE Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
SUPER FINE + RAW Record both RAW and super-fine quality JPEG or HEIF images.
FINE + RAW Record both RAW and fine-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW Record RAW images only.

The Function Buttons

To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 385). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option currently selected for Option selected by pressing function
IMAGE QUALITY button to which RAW is assigned
SUPER FINE SUPER FINE + RAW
FINE FINE + RAW 6
NORMAL NORMAL + RAW
SUPER FINE + RAW SUPER FINE

The Shooting Menus

FINE + RAW FINE
NORMAL + RAW NORMAL
RAW FINE

127
 RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.

RECORDING TYPE

Option Description
UNCOMPRESSED RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces file size with no loss of image data. The im-
ages can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifilm 1,
Capture One for Fujifilm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILE
CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW
LOSSLESS
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent (14-bit RAW) or 45 to 100 percent (16-bit RAW) of
their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
6 COMPRESSED but the resulting files are anywhere from about 25 to 35 per-
cent (14-bit RAW) or 30 to 40 percent (16-bit RAW) of their
uncompressed size.
The Shooting Menus

1 For information on when support will be available, visit:

https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-powered-
by-silkypix/

OUTPUT DEPTH(bit)
Option Description
16bit RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 16 bits.
14bit RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits.

O 16bit is available in STILL IMAGE and PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT drive
modes only.

128
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG for-
JPEG
mat.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent com-
HEIF
pression but limited options for viewing and sharing.

O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-ex-

posure photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the ex-
tension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.

The Shooting Menus

129
 FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including black-
and-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette ac-
cording to your subject and creative intent.
Option Description
c PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects.

d Velvia/VIVID Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.

e ASTIA/SOFT Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.

i CLASSIC CHROME Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable for
c REALA ACE various scenes.
g PRO Neg. Hi Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.

h PRO Neg. Std Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
6 g CLASSIC Neg. depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
n NOSTALGIC Neg.
The Shooting Menus

photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for film look
X ETERNA/CINEMA movie.
N ETERNA BLEACH Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-
BYPASS able for still and movie.

130
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Option Description
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
a ACROS • d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray cor-
responding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
b MONOCHROME and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-
ens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
f SEPIA Shoots in sepia tone.
6
N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness

The Shooting Menus

settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).
• For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories

131
 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

cool color cast) to the a ACROS and

b MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes. SET

GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.

ROUGHNESS

Option Description
STRONG Choose for rougher grains.
WEAK Choose for smoother grains.
OFF Turn the effect off.

SIZE
6
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

LARGE Choose for coarser grains.

SMALL Choose for finer grains.

132
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR CHROME EFFECT

Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option Description
STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

COLOR CHROME FX BLUE

Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option Description
STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

Smooth complexions.
6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

133
 DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-
tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option Description
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
X 400% Reduce loss of detail in highlights.

O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value

according to the scene.
N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-
ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800.

6
The Shooting Menus

134
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-
ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-
AUTO
ditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
STRONG
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
WEAK
high-contrast scenes.
OFF Contrast reduction off.
N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to ad-
just these settings manually, choose OFF.

The Shooting Menus

135
 WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
Option Description
WA WHITE White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
PRIORITY whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically.
AA AMBIENCE White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
PRIORITY whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
k CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2 Measure a value for white balance.
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
Choose a color temperature.
TEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT For subjects in direct sunlight.
j SHADE For subjects in the shade.
k FLUORESCENT
Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-1
6
l FLUORESCENT
Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-2
The Shooting Menus

m FLUORESCENT
Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-3
n INCANDESCENT
Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
g UNDERWATER
lighting.

136
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for

example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance op-
tion suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white WB SHIFT

balance option displays a fine-tuning

dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to
fine-tune white balance.

SET

N • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-

lecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white bal-
ance. 6

The Shooting Menus

137
 Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white CUSTOM 1

balance for unusual lighting conditions

using a white object as a reference (col-
ored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tar- SHUTTER : NEW WB

get will be displayed; position and size SHIFT NOT CHANGE

the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK COMPLETED !

to set white balance to the measured

value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure com- SET CANCEL

6 pensation and try again.

The Shooting Menus

k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-
er” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.

138
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

1 Select k in the white balance menu. WHITE BALANCE

The option currently selected for col-

or temperature will be displayed. COLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0

SET SHIFT

2 Edit the color temperature using the COLOR TEMPERATURE

focus stick (focus lever) and press

MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be dis-
played.
SET SHIFT

N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K by

rotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.

3 Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick.

6
4 Press MENU/OK.

The Shooting Menus

The changes will be applied. The se-
lected color temperature will appear
in the display.

Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-
pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.

139
 TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the TONE CURVE
HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer. SET CANCEL

Option Description
HIGHLIGHTS -2 to +4
SHADOWS -2 to +4

COLOR
Adjust color density.
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

SHARPNESS
6 Sharpen or soften outlines.
The Shooting Menus

Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-
er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

140
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shad-
ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased defi-
nition, lower values for a softer effect.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases

the time need to save each shot.

LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
ON OFF

O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save

times.

LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER

6
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and

The Shooting Menus

the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON OFF

COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option Description
sRGB Recommended in most situations.
Adobe RGB For commercial printing.

141
 xF PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or mov-
ies.

1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE

QUALITY SETTING tab.

2 Highlight xF PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to per-

form pixel mapping.
O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-
vated.
• Processing may take several tens of seconds.
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situa-
tions. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to
positions C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6) (P 86).
6
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
The Shooting Menus

Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-

matically.
Option Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
ENABLE
CUSTOM 6 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
DISABLE
settings must be applied manually (P 87).

142
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING

Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 197).
Shutter Select
When using lenses with an internal shutter, choose whether to
use the shutter on the camera (BODY) or the lens (LENS).
O This option may have no effect with some lenses.
Saved Settings
Store settings for up to 6 lenses, or choose OFF to disable correc-
tions for focal length, distortion, color shading, and peripheral
illumination.
Choosing a Focal Length
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to enter LENS 5

INPUT FOCAL LENGTH

the focal length.
6

The Shooting Menus

SET CANCEL

Distortion Correction
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION

BARREL STRONG
WEAK options to correct BARREL or BARREL MEDIUM
BARREL WEAK
PINCUSHION distortion. OFF
PINCUSHION WEAK
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG

143
 Color Shading Correction
Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be ad-
justed separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below. NEXT SET

1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-

ed corner is indicated by a triangle.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is
no visible difference in color between the selected corner and
the center of the image.
• Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the
cyan–red axis.
• Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the
blue–yellow axis.
N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
6 while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
The Shooting Menus

144
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral il-
lumination. Positive values are recom-
mended for vintage lenses, negative val- SET CANCEL

ues to create the effect of images taken

with an antique lens or a pinhole camera.
N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-
rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.

The Shooting Menus

145
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK AF/MF SETTING

FOCUS AREA
in the photo shooting display and select AF MODE
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF MODE ALL SETTING
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
xFWRAP FOCUS POINT
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).

AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 95).

6 ZONE CUSTOM SETTING

Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF
The Shooting Menus

MODE.
Option
ZONE CUSTOM 1 ZONE CUSTOM 2 ZONE CUSTOM 3

AF MODE ALL SETTING

Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL.
You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area to
be used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is
S (AF-S) or C (AF-C).
Option
AF-S AF-C

146
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS

Select focus-tracking options for focus AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options. TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
OK

Option Description
A standard tracking option that works well with
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for sub- 6
SUBJECT jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switch-

The Shooting Menus

ing subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150).

147
 Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the TRACKING SENSITIVITY

camera waits to switch focus when an

QUICK LOCKED ON
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
SETS THE TRACKING
the value, the longer the camera will wait. SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT

ADJUST SWITCH

Options
0 1 2 3 4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

6 SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY

This parameter determines how sensi- SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
The Shooting Menus

tive the tracking system is to changes in

STEADY ACCEL./DECEL.
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
system attempts to respond to sudden SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT

movement. ADJUST SWITCH

Options
0 1 2

O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.

148
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

ZONE AREA SWITCHING

This parameter determines the focus ZONE AREA SWITCHING

area given priority in zone AF.

CENTER AUTO FRONT

SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY

OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA

ADJUST SWITCH

Option Description
FRONT Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
AUTO
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
CENTER Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.

O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.

Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
TRACKING SPEED TRACKING ZONE AREA
SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SWITCHING
6
SET 1 2 0 AUTO

The Shooting Menus

SET 2 3 0 CENTER
SET 3 2 2 AUTO
SET 4 0 1 FRONT
SET 5 3 2 AUTO

149
 Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.

1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS > AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS

SET 6 CUSTOM
SET 6 CUSTOM.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
ADJUST SET DETAIL RESET

2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.

3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION

Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-
trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
6 camera is in landscape orientation.
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

OFF The same settings are used in both orientations.

FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

150
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >
AF MODE.
Options
ON OFF

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT

Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders
of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to
another.
Option Description
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the
ENABLE
display to another.
DISABLE Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS

Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se- 6
lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected

The Shooting Menus

for AF MODE.
Option Description
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.

151
 PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON OFF

O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.

xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON OFF

O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator

6 in some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
The Shooting Menus

subject.
• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 200).

152
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for por-
traits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
ON • w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
6
Detection.
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

The Shooting Menus

O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON auto-
matically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

153
 N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-
ed at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-
entation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
6 • Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 376).
The Shooting Menus

154
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING

Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option Description
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
• F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and in-
sects.
SUBJECT • G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
DETECTION ON
for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF Subject detection off. 6
O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-

The Shooting Menus

ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

155
 N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be sus-
pended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 376).

6
The Shooting Menus

156
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON OFF

O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus

mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
infinity or the minimum focus distance.

N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations

are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist op-
tions selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.

AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE 6
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area

The Shooting Menus

by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.

157
 MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
Option Description
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITAL
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).

INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING

If ON is selected, the display configured by MF ASSIST appears
only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode.

6 Options
ON OFF
The Shooting Menus

158
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-
cus mode.
Options
ON OFF

N • Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.

• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA

Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
ON OFF

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or 6
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or

The Shooting Menus

AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
Option Description
AF-S The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
AF-C The camera focuses while the button is pressed.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).

159
 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.
Option Description
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of field
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of field
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus
modes can be selected separately.
Option Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
6 RELEASE
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
The Shooting Menus

FOCUS
taken when the camera is in focus.

O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.

160
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option Description
OFF Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances defined by a minimum and
maximum.
CUSTOM • OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-
tween them.
PRESET1
Limit focus to a preset range.
PRESET2

O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the min-
imum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ from
the actual focus distance.
• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with fo-
cus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens. 6
N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM

The Shooting Menus

is selected:
- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
range.
- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).

161
 TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode Description
• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
AF you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
AF OFF
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
AREA move to the selected point.

OFF Touch screen mode off.

6
N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
The Shooting Menus

• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

162
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom

Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.

Mode Operation performed

AF-S: AF
AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
AREA
MF: Instant AF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected 6
for touch screen mode.

The Shooting Menus

163
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK SHOOTING SETTING

SELF-TIMER
in the photo shooting display and select SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab. INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
N The options available vary with the shoot- INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE

ing mode selected. AE BKT SETTING

FILM SIMULATION BKT
EXIT

SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option Description
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
6 self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF Self-timer off.
The Shooting Menus

If an option other than OFF is selected, the

timer will start when the shutter button is
9
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.

164
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING

If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain
in effect after the camera is turned off.
Options
ON OFF

SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON OFF

The Shooting Menus

165
 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.

1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab

and press MENU/OK. WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER

2 Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES

INTERVAL NUMBER OF TIMES

and press MENU/OK.

Interval-timer settings will be dis-
played.

END CANCEL

N If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,
6 where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote
release.
The Shooting Menus

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to START WAITING TIME

choose the interval and number of

shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed. LATER

ESTIMATED START TIME PM

START CANCEL

166
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

4 Use the focus stick to choose the

starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.

CANCEL

O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of

“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.

N • Use of a tripod is recommended.

• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-
val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the
a button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the 6
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-

The Shooting Menus

phy started, set the number of shots to ∞.

167
 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON OFF

O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.

INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE

If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during in-
terval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not lon-
ger than the interval between photographs.
Options
6 ON OFF
The Shooting Menus

O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto).

168
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option Description
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES/STEP SETTING • FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each
shot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.

FILM SIMULATION BKT

Choose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 130).

FOCUS BKT SETTING 6

Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes

The Shooting Menus

(P 115).

PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 108).

169
 SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option Description
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
SHUTTER front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
u MECHANICAL + The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
ELECTRONIC shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
r E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
conditions.
If t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER is selected, t MECHANICAL
SHUTTER will automatically take effect at high shutter speeds.
O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
6 shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
-Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
or other flickering or erratic illumination.
The Shooting Menus

- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 340), respect

your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.

N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:

• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 80–12800
• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect
• The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.

170
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting under
fluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option Description
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
ALL FRAMES
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the first frame only
FIRST FRAME and the same reduction amount is applied to all subse-
quent frames that flicker may occur.
OFF Flicker reduction disabled.

O • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.

• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-
ter is used.
• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flick-
er caused by LED lighting and the like.
6
Options

The Shooting Menus

ON OFF

N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.

ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 106).

171
 IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option Description
CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
SHOOTING ONLY
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
OFF Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

35mm FORMAT MODE

Enabling A SHOOTING SETTING > 35mm
FORMAT MODE in the shooting menu sets
the picture angle to 35 mm; the change is
reflected in the display.

6
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

The picture angle is set to 35 mm; the change is reflected in the

ON
display.
OFF 35 mm format mode disabled.
35 mm format mode is enabled automatically when a mount
AUTO
adapter that supports automatic detection is attached.

N • The D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING item in the setup
menu (P 25, 349) includes an option (enabled by default) for dis-
playing a 35mm FORMAT MODE icon.
• The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-
ing menu is fixed at O 3 : 2.

172
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

xF COOLING FAN SETTING

Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 416).
Option Description
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
AUTO1
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
AUTO2 temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
LOW Run the fan continuously at low speed.
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fan
HIGH
noise may be audible in movies.
OFF Turn the fan off.

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic- 6
tures
• Upload location data to the camera

The Shooting Menus

N For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

173
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK FLASH SETTING

in the photo shooting display and select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

RED EYE REMOVAL
the F (FLASH SETTING) tab. TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING

EXIT

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

Choose a flash control mode, flash mode, MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.
N For more information on flash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 400) in “Peripher-
ADJUST END
als and Optional Accessories”.

RED EYE REMOVAL

6
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
The Shooting Menus

Option Description
FLASH Flash red-eye reduction only.
OFF Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off.

N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.

174
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-
graphs.
Option Description
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-flashes and locks flash
FLASH output at the metered value.

N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 385).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.

LED LIGHT SETTING

Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if avail-
able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. 6
Option Role of LED video light in still photography

The Shooting Menus

CATCHLIGHT Catchlight
AF ASSIST AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF None

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

175
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a command-
er for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.

Options
Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the com-
mander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multi-
ple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
6 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
The Shooting Menus

176
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording, MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST

press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis- IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE MODE
play and select the B (MOVIE SETTING) HIGH SPEED REC
SELF-TIMER
tab. MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
EXIT

MOVIE SETTING LIST

View current movie recording settings.
N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.

IMAGE FORMAT
You can change the format of movies to be shot depending on
the lens to be used. Frame size and aspect ratio are set by MOVIE
MODE.
6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

GF Shoot in the optimal format for GF Series lenses.
Premista Shoot in the optimal format for Premista Series lenses.
35mm Shoot in the optimal format for 35-mm format lenses.
Shoot in the optimal format for anamorphic lenses. You can
ANAMORPHIC(35mm) configure the lens magnification or whether to use the des-
queeze display when taking pictures.

O • When ANAMORPHIC(35mm) is set, an anti-vibration func-

tion operates to match the configured magnification. Do not set
ANAMORPHIC(35mm) when using a lens other than an anamorphic
lens.
• When B MOVIE SETTING > HDMI OUTPUT SETTING > HDMI
OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY is set to OFF, HDMI output does not use
the desqueeze display, even when desqueeze display is set to ON for
ANAMORPHIC(35mm).

177
 MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the MOVIE MODE

frame rate and the frame size and aspect

ratio.

END CANCEL

1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-

light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the

desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick
right.
The setting values that can be selected depend on the IMAGE
FORMAT setting.

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a

6 frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.
Options
The Shooting Menus

23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P

N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.

178
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HIGH SPEED REC

Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.

Frame Size

Options
W16 : 9 W17 : 9

Recording

Options
100P 120P

Playback 6

The Shooting Menus

Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P

N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.

• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.

179
 F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
• The display shows the number of sec-
onds remaining before recording be-
gins.
• To stop the timer before recording be-
gins, press DISP/BACK.

Options
3 SEC 5 SEC 10 SEC OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

180
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MEDIA REC SETTING

Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, bit
rate, and proxy video.

MEDIA REC SETTING

Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, and
compression.
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for mov-
ies.
Option Description
P Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Q Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
R fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be record-
ed to the card in Slot 2.
T Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Movies are recorded only to an SSD connected to the USB con-
Y
nector.
6
U Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.

The Shooting Menus

O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.

181
 File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
Option Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
H.264 ALL-I 420 MOV recorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP in-
H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV
terframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sam-
pling.
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4
to the web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0
6 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
The Shooting Menus

H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-

H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2
chroma sub-sampling.
ProRes HQ MOV * Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
ProRes 422 MOV * Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
ProRes LT MOV * Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.
* Available only when P is selected as the destination.

182
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

N • The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on a

computer or the like.
• 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the op-
tions selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
50Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps 360Mbps 720Mbps

N • The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for
high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate 6
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
• The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the for-

The Shooting Menus

mat chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit the
Apple website.

183
 PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate
“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
Option Description
ON (H.264) Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF Proxy recording disabled.

O • Proxy recording is not available at a frame size of 8K if the frame rate

is either 29.97P or 25P.
• Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.
• When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,
be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.

HDMI OUTPUT SETTING

Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.

6 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY

If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
The Shooting Menus

will mirror the information in the camera display.

Options
ON OFF

HDMI REC CONTROL

Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

184
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

RAW OUTPUT SETTING

Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
Option Description
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOS
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING Blackmagic
OFF Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.

N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 8K.

• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 640 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output. 6
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not dis-
play correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.

The Shooting Menus

• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.

FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION

Fix the movie crop ratio according to the IMAGE FORMAT set-
ting. This makes it easier to match crops after changing movie
settings.
Options
ON OFF

185
 F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option Description
The footage is processed using film simulation and both
cPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.

N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO 400 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 800
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the in-
ternational ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
6 displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 640 and ISO 12800.
The Shooting Menus

• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected

for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.

186
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

DATA LEVEL SETTING

Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
VIDEO RANGE
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
FULL RANGE
0–255 and 0–1023.

F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 108).

F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 171).
Options
ON OFF
6

The Shooting Menus

187
 F IS MODE
Choose the image stabilization mode.
Option Description
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS/OIS
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
IBIS/OIS + DIS
selected for MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate
for more severe camera shake.
OFF Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option Description
6 ON Suitable for shots with no panning.
OFF Suitable for shots with panning.
The Shooting Menus

N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-

bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 385).

188
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Option Description
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may
H (25600)
be reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in
100–12800
display.
The ISO sensitivity (ISO 100 to ISO 12800) for the brightness
AUTO
of the subject is set automatically.

ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option Description
ZEBRA RIGHT Right-slanting stripes.
ZEBRA LEFT Left-slanting stripes.
OFF Stripes off.
6
ZEBRA LEVEL

The Shooting Menus

Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
Options
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100

189
 WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Choose whether to display chrominance and luminance signals
during movie recording. The position and size can be changed
using the focus stick (focus lever) and command dials.
Options
WAVEFORM PARADE VECTORSCOPE OFF

WAVEFORM
A waveform is displayed. WAVEFORM SETTING

SET SWITCH DISP.

PARADE
An RGB parade is displayed. You can PARADE SETTING

change the display method for colors by

6 turning the front command dial.
The Shooting Menus

SET COLOR SWITCH DISP.

190
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

VECTORSCOPE
A vectorscope is displayed. VECTORSCOPE SETTING

SET SWITCH DISP.

OFF
Neither a waveform monitor, a parade, nor a vectorscope is dis-
played.

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL

Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may find this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-
corded with movies (P 36).
Options
ON OFF
6

The Shooting Menus

F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie record-

ing.

191
 TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator

Option Description
FRONT OFF
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
REAR z
FRONT OFF
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
REAR y
FRONT z
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
REAR z
FRONT z
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
6 REAR OFF
FRONT y
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The Shooting Menus

REAR y
FRONT y
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
REAR OFF
FRONT OFF
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
REAR OFF

192
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

xF COOLING FAN SETTING

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).

F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 86).

F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).

The Shooting Menus

193
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press IMAGE QUALITY SETTING

FFILM SIMULATION
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FDYNAMIC RANGE
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) FWHITE BALANCE
FTONE CURVE
tab. FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 130).

F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
6
The Shooting Menus

194
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option Description
V100%
W200% See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 134).
X400%

N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during

movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 200 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 400 to 12800.
• Thisitem is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.

F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 136).

F TONE CURVE
6
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings

The Shooting Menus

must be adjusted separately (P 140).

F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).

195
 F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).

F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).

INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO OFF

N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved

during shooting.

xF PIXEL MAPPING
6 This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
The Shooting Menus

196
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY

Choose whether to make the dynamic range wider when shoot-
ing F-Log2 movies with IMAGE FORMAT set to GF or Premista,
image size set to d or V, and a frame rate of 30 fps or less.
The rolling shutter effect may occur when this setting is enabled.
Options
ON OFF

F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION

Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNT
ADAPTOR SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 145). 6
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-

The Shooting Menus

tion.

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to
one apply to the other.

197
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK AF/MF SETTING

FFOCUS AREA
in the movie shooting display and select FAF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. xFWRAP FOCUS POINT
xFAF ILLUMINATOR
FgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).
O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
6
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

MULTI The camera selects the focus area automatically.

The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick
(focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touched
WIDE/TRACKING
when the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus
subject automatically when the focus mode is S.
AREA The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.

198
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING

Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-
ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-
ject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148).
Options
0 1 2 3 4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
6
Options

The Shooting Menus

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 151). Changes to
one apply to the other.

199
 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to
one apply to the other.

Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option Description
FACE DETECTION ON See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153).
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus us-
ing continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.

F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
6 must be adjusted separately (P 155).
O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
The Shooting Menus

DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT

DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.

200
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
ON OFF

F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
Option Description
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
FOCUS METER A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
HIGHLIGHT Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed
FOCUS MAP
on the screen.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).
6
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING

The Shooting Menus

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 158).

201
 F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 159).

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.

xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 160). Changes to
one apply to the other.

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

202
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F TOUCH SCREEN MODE

Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
AF focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
• When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap the
display before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to posi-
tion the focus point.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
AREA
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust 6
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

The Shooting Menus

lected by tapping the display.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-
tion the focus area over your subject.

OFF Touch screen mode off.

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

203
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom

Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.

Mode Operation performed

AF-S: AF
AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
AREA
MF: Instant AF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
6 cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
The Shooting Menus

FOCUS CHECK LOCK

Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie re-
cording begins.
Options
ON OFF

204
 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK AUDIO SETTING

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

in the movie shooting display and select EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
the P (AUDIO SETTING) tab. MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
EXIT

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

6
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.

The Shooting Menus

Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.

205
 MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
MIC
phone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
LINE
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER

Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
6 Options
ON OFF
The Shooting Menus

206
 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

LOW CUT FILTER

Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-
mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release.
Options
m MIC n REMOTE
6

The Shooting Menus

207
 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING

Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING • XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
6 Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
The Shooting Menus

HDMI 4ch AUDIO the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
OUTPUT nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an XLR microphone adapter will be used, remove the viewfinder.

• If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.

208
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-
ber) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press TIME CODE SETTING

TIME CODE DISPLAY

MENU/OK in the movie shooting display START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING) DROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
tab. TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING

EXIT

TIME CODE DISPLAY

Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
ON OFF

START TIME SETTING

Choose the time code starting time. 6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00.

209
 COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option Description
REC RUN Time is clocked only during movie recording.
FREE RUN Time is clocked continuously.

DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-
ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
ON
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
OFF Frames are not dropped.
6 N • The time code display varies with the option selected.
The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF
• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.

210
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT

Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON OFF

TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING

Choose whether to synchronize time codes with an external de-
vice.

CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT

If ON is selected, the camera connects with paired external de-
vices and synchronizes time codes. Because simultaneous con-
nection with a smartphone is not possible, the smartphone icon
is displayed in the yellow on the screen.
Options
ON OFF

PAIRING REGISTRATION 6
Pair the ATOMOS AirGlu BT and camera.

The Shooting Menus

• If the camera connects with the ATOMOS
AirGlu BT, an icon appears on the screen.

• The pairing with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT can be ended using

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
in the network/USB setting menu.

211
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

Time code synchronization state

You can check the time code synchronization
state by the icons displayed on the EVF or LCD.

Icon Synchronization state

The time code synchronization function is not
(white) being used.

Time codes are being synchronized.

(white)
External devices have been disconnected or time
codes are not being synchronized. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the camera
(amber) continues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is
displayed.
6
Time codes are not being synchronized because
the frame rate settings are different. If time codes
The Shooting Menus

have been synchronized once, and the camera

(red) continues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is
displayed.

212
Playback and the Playback
Menu

213
 The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A B C D E F G H I

12/31/2023
n J
m
K
l
Playback and the Playback Menu

k L
M
N
j
i
h
g
f
e
O

7 d
c b a Z Y X W V U TS R Q P

214
 The Playback Display

A Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 U Film simulation ............................................130

B Frame-number display V Dynamic range ............................................134
C Image transfer order W White balance ..............................................136
D FTP image transfer order X Sensitivity .......................................................171
E Frame.io image transfer order Y Exposure compensation ............................109
F Image transfer status Z Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
G FTP upload progress a Time code.......................................................209

Playback and the Playback Menu

H Frame.io upload progress b Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
I Frame number..............................................369 c Playback mode indicator .............................63
J SSD connection status ..................................49 d Movie icon ........................................................73
K Card slot..........................................................220 e Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio ... 208
L Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................121 f Bluetooth host ..............................................247
M Protected image ...........................................228 g Photobook assist indicator .......................236
N Location data................................................373 h Bluetooth ON/OFF
O Low battery ......................................................55 i DPOF print indicator ...................................238
P Image quality................................................127 j Frame.io connection status ......................274
Q Movie mode ..................................................178 k Voice memo ..................................................230
R HEIF ..................................................................129 l Gift image .........................................................63
S Image size ......................................................126 m Rating..............................................................231
T Film format ....................................................182 n Face detection indicator ............................153
7

215
 The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.

Standard Information off

12/31/2023 1/999
Playback and the Playback Menu

12/31/2023 1/999

NEXT

7
Info display

216
 The Playback Display

Viewing Photo Information

The photo information display changes each
time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.

Basic data Info display 1

12/31/2023 1/999 12/31/2023 1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

NEXT

12/31/2022

1/1000 5.6 12800 +1.0

S.S 1/1000 F 5.6 ISO 12800 +1.0

BACK NEXT

Info display 3 Info display 2 7

Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.

217
 Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to
playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear com-
mand dial to right or left, the display changes as shown. The dis-
play changes in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite
direction.
N To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or
MENU/OK.
Playback and the Playback Menu

Maximum zoom Medium zoom

Playback zoom

Full-frame playback
Multi-frame playback

Nine-frame view Hundred- frame view

218
 Viewing Pictures

Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.
N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick
(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the
image not currently visible in the display.

Playback and the Playback Menu

Navigation window

Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-
mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame. 7
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.

219
 The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when PLAY BACK MENU

SWITCH SLOT
you press MENU/OK in playback mode. RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT

SWITCH SLOT
Playback and the Playback Menu

Choose the card or SSD from which images will be played back.
N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a but-
ton during playback to choose a card for playback.

220
 The Playback Menu

RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.

Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format

1 Display a RAW picture.

2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3 Press MENU/OK. RAW CONVERSION

A list of settings will be displayed. REFLECT SHOOTING COND.

FILE TYPE

Playback and the Playback Menu

IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE

CREATE CANCEL

4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a

setting.
5 Press the focus stick right to display RAW CONVERSION

options.
100%
200%
400%

6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.

7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
8 Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9 Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-
ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
221
 The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting Description
Create a copy using the settings in effect at the time
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE Choose a file format.
IMAGE SIZE Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
D RANGE PRIORITY for natural-looking results when photographing
Playback and the Playback Menu

high-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION Simulate the effects of different types of film.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT Add a film grain effect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME EFFECT colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
7 blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY Increase definition.
Improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.

222
 The Playback Menu

HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION

Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.

SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.

FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Options
JPEG TIFF 8bit TIFF 16bit

Playback and the Playback Menu

SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the destination to which the converted pictures will be
saved.
Options
SSD SLOT 1 SLOT 2

223
 ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-
tures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option Description
FRAME Delete pictures one at a time.
SELECTED FRAMES Delete multiple selected pictures.
ALL FRAMES Delete all unprotected pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu

FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete.
N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-
cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to
delete.
7

224
 The Playback Menu

SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
confirmation dialog.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

tures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a 7
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.

225
 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
ON
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
OFF
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Playback and the Playback Menu

CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.

2 Select CROP in the playback menu.

3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.

7 4 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.

5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate

file.
N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.

226
 The Playback Menu

RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.

2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu.

3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation

dialog.

4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate

file.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.

227
 PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
FRAME right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
SET ALL Protect all pictures.
RESET ALL Remove protection from all pictures.

O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-

phones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON but-
ton during playback.

228
 The Playback Menu

IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.

1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.

2 Display the desired picture.

3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.

4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.

5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in

Playback and the Playback Menu

the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-
tating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are auto-
matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.

229
 VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.

1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.

2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.

3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-
cord the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you re-
lease the dial.
N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu

• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.

Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-
mand dial.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then
pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
7

230
 The Playback Menu

RATING
Rate pictures using stars.

1 Select RATING in the playback menu.

2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the

rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).

N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front com-
mand dial to choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in

Playback and the Playback Menu

single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)

231
 COPY
Copy pictures between a card in the first slot, a card in the sec-
ond slot, and an SSD connected to the USB connector.

1 Select COPY in the playback menu.

2 Highlight one of the following options.

Option Description
SSD y SLOT1 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the first slot.
SSD y SLOT2 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the second slot.
SLOT1 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the SSD.
Playback and the Playback Menu

Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
SLOT2 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the SSD.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the first slot.

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.

4 Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.

Option Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to
FRAME
7 view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
ALL FRAMES Copy all pictures.

O • Copying ends when the destination is full.

• If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.

232
 The Playback Menu

TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE

Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &

TRANSFER.
N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.

2 Mark pictures for upload. SELECT IMAGE

FRAME

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK

Playback and the Playback Menu

to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE

that meet selected criteria, press SELECT FINISH/SETTING

DISP/BACK before marking begins.

• To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
7
3 Press DISP/BACK and select START SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

TRANSFER. START TRANSFER

FILTERING
The selected pictures will be upload- SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT

ed. FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND

START TRANSFER

233
 Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
teria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER

• To switch to the memory card in the other slot, FILTERING

SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.

• The following cannot be selected for upload:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- RAW images
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
7 continue even while the camera is off.
• When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the
picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

234
 The Playback Menu

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
• Upload location data to the camera
N • For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

Playback and the Playback Menu

• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the Fn1 button.

DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK

If ON is selected, movies taken when B MOVIE SETTING > IMAGE
FORMAT is set to ANAMORPHIC(35mm) are played back at the
magnification specified when taken.
Options
ON OFF
7

235
 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.

Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.

2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-
ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the
book is complete.
N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
Playback and the Playback Menu

for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.

3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-

lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
7

236
 The Playback Menu

Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.

Editing and Deleting Photobooks

Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-
screen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

237
 PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.

1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).

2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-

tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.

3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the

print order.
Playback and the Playback Menu

4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up PRINT ORDER (DPOF)

DPOF: 00001
or down to choose the number of
copies (up to 99).
N To remove a picture from the order, 01 SHEETS
press the focus stick down until the FRAME SET
number of copies is 0.
Total number
of prints
Number of copies

7
N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.

238
 The Playback Menu

instax PRINTER PRINT

To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.

1 Turn the printer on.

2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con- instax-12345678

nect to the printer. CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

Playback and the Playback Menu

CANCEL

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to PRINTER PRINT

100-0020
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start. SET CANCEL
instax-12345678

N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.

• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD 7
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.

239
 The Playback Menu

DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).

Options
16 : 9 4:3
Playback and the Playback Menu

N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 4 : 3 full screen.

The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.

240
Network/USB Setting Menus

241
 Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and
take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.

Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:

Features that can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

Feature Description P
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
Connecting to the
pictures or control the camera remotely while the 247
smartphone app
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
Network/USB Setting Menus

Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone

USB card readers 252
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
Web camera 257
as a webcam.
instax printers Print pictures on connected instax printers. 258
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography 260
is connected (“tethered”) via a USB cable.
Harness the power of the camera’s image
RAW processing processing engine when processing RAW pictures 291
on a computer.
8
Saving and Loading Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a
292
Settings computer.
These features can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

242
 Overview

Features that can be accessed if set by CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION

SETTING

Feature Description P
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography 260
is connected (“tethered”) via wireless or wired LAN.
Upload to FTP servers Upload files to FTP servers. 278
Remote movie Control the camera and take pictures remotely using
293
recording a web browser on a computer or tablet.
These features can be accessed by selecting a connection setting
profile to which the desired settings and connection type have
been saved using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING.

Features that can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting menu

Network/USB Setting Menus

Feature Description P
Upload to Frame.io Upload files to Frame.io. 270
These features can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting
menu.

243
 Camera indicator lamp display
The camera indicator lamp shows the
status of its connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like.

Indicator lamp Connection status

Blinks red No network connection.
Glows red No network connection; pictures awaiting upload.
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
Blinks orange
ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
Network/USB Setting Menus

Blinks orange and red ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server;
pictures awaiting upload.
Ready for tethered photography, upload to Frame.io,
Blinks green
or FTP upload.
Ready for tethered photography, upload to
Blinks green and red
Frame.io, or FTP upload; pictures awaiting upload.

244
 Overview

The EVF/LCD Displays

The status of the connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like is also shown
by an icon in the electronic viewfinder or LCD
monitor.

Icon Connection status

No network connection.
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Ready for tethered photography, FTP upload, or
upload to Frame.io.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

245
 Overview

Connection Setting Profiles

Connection setting profiles contain information on both network
settings and the type of connection used. You can connect to
computers and smartphones by selecting the associated profile.

Selecting a Connection Setting Profile

To select a connection setting pro- SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
UNIVERSAL SETTING
file, press MENU/OK and choose SELECT USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
CONNECTION SETTING in the I (net- USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
work/USB setting) tab. USB WEBCAM
NOT CREATED
NOT CREATED

N For tethered photography via wireless LAN, you will first need to create
and save a new connection setting profile by following the instruc-
Network/USB Setting Menus

tions of a wizard displayed by selecting CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION

SETTING.

Saving Connection Setting Profiles

To create a connection setting profile containing information on
network/USB settings and the type of connection used, select
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB set-
ting menu.

8 Choose CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION CREATE USING WIZARD

SMARTPHONE APP
SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD, se- USB CARD READER
WEBCAM
lect the desired network/USB settings, PRINTER PRINT
TETHER SHOOTING
and save the resulting profile (P 313).
CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP

246
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to
copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-
motely while previewing the view through the lens in the
smartphone display.
N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.

Installing Smartphone Apps

Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and
camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-
phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired
apps on your phone.

Network/USB Setting Menus

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.

Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.
8
1 Press DISP/BACK while shooting infor-
mation is displayed.

N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK

button during playback.

247
 2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Bluetooth

Bluetooth

3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth

PAIRING
Bluetooth ON/OFF

4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone

with the camera.
Network/USB Setting Menus

More information is available at the following website:

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the cam-
era and smartphone will automati-
cally connect via Bluetooth. A smart-
phone icon and a white Bluetooth
icon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.
8
N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-
cally connect to the camera when the app is launched.
• Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-
phone reduces the drain on the battery.

248
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)

Using the Smartphone App

Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSAL
SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
N Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF.

Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App

You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the
smartphone app.
N More information is available from the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken

Network/USB Setting Menus

Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired de-
vice.
N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZE 8
IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu en-
ables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 322).
• Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.

249
 Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu
Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &
TRANSFER to select pictures for upload to a paired smartphone
or tablet via Bluetooth®.

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE

& TRANSFER.
N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.

2 Mark pictures for upload. SELECT IMAGE

FRAME

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK

to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
Network/USB Setting Menus

SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE

that meet selected criteria, press SELECT FINISH/SETTING

DISP/BACK before marking begins.

• To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

8 3 Press DISP/BACK and select START SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

TRANSFER. START TRANSFER

FILTERING
The selected pictures will be upload- SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT

ed. FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND

START TRANSFER

250
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot

To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

teria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER

• To switch to the memory card in the other slot, FILTERING

SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.

• The following cannot be selected for upload:

Network/USB Setting Menus

- Protected pictures
- Movies
- RAW images
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off.
• When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the 8
picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

251
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.

Copying Pictures to a Smartphone

Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.

For Customers Using Android Devices

How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Network/USB Setting Menus

Type-C
Use the supplied USB cable.
Supplied USB cable

Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male)

8

252
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Micro-B
Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable.
Third-party USB cable USB OTG cable

Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male)

Type-A connector Type-A connector

(male) (female)

O • The smartphone must support USB OTG.

• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–

Network/USB Setting Menus

Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION

SETTING.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the 8
“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move
on to the next step.

4 On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB

PTP”.

5 From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.

The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-
tos and movies to your smartphone.
N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
app, please try again from step 3.

253
 For Customers Using iOS
Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a
USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB
Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter.
Apple Lightning to
Third-party USB cable USB Camera Adapter

Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to

USB Camera Adapter

Type-A connector (male)

Network/USB Setting Menus

1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER

SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION

SETTING.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your
smartphone.
8 O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and
other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter.

254
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Connecting the Camera and Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION

SETTING.
3 Turn the camera off.
4 Turn the computer on.
5 Connect a USB cable.

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB connector (Type-C)

O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be
suitable for data transfer.
8
6 Turn the camera on.

7 Copy pictures to your computer.

• Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer
using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-
er software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size.
• Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.

255
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable.

• When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-
serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the
computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
• Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-
necting the camera.
• If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-
able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
• Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning
the camera off.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card.
Network/USB Setting Menus

• Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.

• In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-
alone computer.
• Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-
connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in
progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has
ceased to be displayed.
8 • The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or
Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.

256
 Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-
cam.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

257
 instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.

Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and
password.

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password

The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
Network/USB Setting Menus

that password instead.

258
 instax SHARE Printers

Printing Pictures
1 Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

2 Turn the printer on.

3 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con- instax-12345678

nect to the printer. CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

CANCEL

4 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to PRINTER PRINT

100-0020
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK.

Network/USB Setting Menus

SET CANCEL
instax-12345678

N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.

• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
5 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.
8

259
 Tethered Photography
The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs
taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or
wired LAN.
• Tethered Photography via USB (P 260)
• Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN (P 262)
• Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 267)
Tethered Photography via USB
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photog-
raphy.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
Network/USB Setting Menus

setting menu.

2 Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB

TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
O • If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-
tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to
which the camera is connected is turned on. When the com-
puter is off or not connected, tethered photography will be sus-
8 pended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card.
• If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to func-
tion in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).

260
 Tethered Photography

4 Take pictures via tethered photography.

Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”.
N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

261
 Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN
Connect to a wireless LAN to use a computer on the network for
tethered photography.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE

USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose TETHERED SHOOTING (P 313).
2 Select CREATE NEW. TETHER SHOOTING

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

Network/USB Setting Menus

SELECT COMM SETTING

SELECT COMM SETTING

TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

4 Select WIRELESS LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

USB
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN

8 TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION

IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING

USB
communication setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

262
 Tethered Photography

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings. WIRELESS LAN

• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim- ACCESS POINT SETTING

ple Access Point Connections” IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).
7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings, WIRELESS LAN

select NEXT.
ACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

8 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile.

Network/USB Setting Menus

SET

ENTER CANCEL

9 Save the connection setting profile.

Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A

CONNECTION SETTING

8
NEXT BACK

10 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW

263
 11 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

12 Choose SELECT. SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

N The connection setting profile can FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

also be selected later using SELECT

CONNECTION SETTING. SELECT
SKIP

13 Take pictures remotely from the computer.

Use software that supports tethered photography.
Network/USB Setting Menus

N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-

low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Simple Access Point Connections

Connect to a computer for tethered photography using the sim-
8 ple setup feature on your wireless LAN router.

1 Select SIMPLE SETUP. ACCESS POINT SETTING

N To select a wireless LAN router or en- SIMPLE SETUP

MANUAL SETUP
ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP. SET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC
(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)

264
 Tethered Photography

2 Follow the on-screen instructions to SIMPLE SETUP

ready the wireless LAN router.

PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
N You also have the option of connect- Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING
ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus CONNECT BY PIN CODE
CANCEL
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.

3 Press MENU/OK when setup is com- MANUAL SETUP

plete.
REGISTRATION COMPLETED

END

Network/USB Setting Menus

Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to a computer for tethered photography using a man-
ually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address
and other network settings.

1 Select MANUAL. WIRELESS LA

LAN

N Select AUTO to assign the camera an POINT SETTING

ACCESS PO
P
IP ADDRES
ADDRESS
AUTO
SS SETTING 000.000.000.000
IP address automatically. NEXT
MANUAL

2 Enter an IP address. IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY ADDRESS
DNS SERVER ADDRESS

265
 • Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP IP ADDRESS

address. SET

ENTER CANCEL

• Select SUBNET MASK and enter a SUBNET MASK

subnet mask. SET

ENTER CANCEL

• Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and en- GATEWAY ADDRESS

ter a gateway address. SET

Network/USB Setting Menus

ENTER CANCEL

• Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and DNS SERVER ADDRESS

enter a DNS server address. SET

8
ENTER CANCEL

266
 Tethered Photography

Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)

Connect to wired LANs (Ethernet networks) for tethered photog-
raphy using network computers.

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into

the camera’s LAN connector.
2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose TETHERED SHOOTING.
3 Select CREATE NEW. TETHER SHOOTING

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

USING WIZARD

4 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

SELECT COMM SETTING

SELECT COMM SETTING

TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

5 Select WIRED LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

USB 8
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN

TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRED LAN CONNECTION

IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD

267
 6 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING
USB
communication setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

7 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. IP ADDRESS SETTING

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as- IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO

signed by the network. NEXT

• Select MANUAL to choose the IP

address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
8 Select NEXT to proceed after adjust- IP ADDRESS SETTING
Network/USB Setting Menus

ing IP address settings.

IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO
NEXT

9 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile. SET

ENTER CANCEL

10 Save the connection setting profile.

Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A

CONNECTION SETTING

NEXT BACK

268
 Tethered Photography

11 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW

12 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

13 Choose SELECT. SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

N The connection setting profile can FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

Network/USB Setting Menus

also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING. SELECT
SKIP

14 Take pictures remotely from the computer.

Use software that supports tethered photography.
N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/ 8
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

269
 Uploading Files to Frame.io
Upload files to Frame.io (P 425).
• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 270)
• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 272)
N Confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date be-
fore proceeding.

Connecting via Wireless LAN

Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN.

1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud > Frame.io Camera to Cloud

CONNECT
CONNECT. DISCONNECT
SELECT FILE TYPE
UPLOAD SETTING
UPLOAD STATUS
Network/USB Setting Menus

NETWORK NOT CONNECTED

Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

2 Select WIRELESS LAN. CONNECT

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
GET PAIRING CODE

NETWORK NOT CONNECTED

Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

8
3 Select ACCESS POINT SETTING. WIRELESS LAN

Select IP ADDRESS SETTING to ACCESS POINT SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING
choose the IP address manually as FINISH

described in “Connecting Using an IP

Address” (P 273).

270
 Uploading Files to Frame.io

4 Select SIMPLE SETUP. ACCESS POINT SETTING

N To select a wireless LAN router or en- SIMPLE SETUP

MANUAL SETUP
ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP. SET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC
(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to SIMPLE SETUP

ready the wireless LAN router.

PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
N You also have the option of connect- Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING
ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus CONNECT BY PIN CODE
CANCEL
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.

Network/USB Setting Menus

6 Press MENU/OK when setup is com- MANUAL SETUP

plete.
REGISTRATION COMPLETED

END

7 Once connected, select GET PAIRING WIRELESS LAN

AAAAAA003
CODE. SUCCESS
GO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
A pairing code will be displayed. 8
CHANGE NETWORK
GET PAIRING CODE
FINISH

8 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and en-

ter the pairing code displayed on the camera.
9 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275).

271
 Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to Frame.io via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into

the camera’s LAN connector.
2 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud > Frame.io Camera to Cloud
CONNECT
CONNECT. DISCONNECT
SELECT FILE TYPE
UPLOAD SETTING
UPLOAD STATUS
NETWORK NOT CONNECTED
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

3 Select WIRED LAN. CONNECT

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
Network/USB Setting Menus

GET PAIRING CODE

NETWORK NOT CONNECTED

Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

4 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. IP ADDRESS SETTING

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as- IP ADDRESS SETTING

signed by the network. FINISH

• Select MANUAL to choose the IP

address manually as described in
8 “Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 273).
5 Once connected, select GET PAIRING WIRED LAN

AAAAAA003
CODE. SUCCESS
GO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
A pairing code will be displayed.
CHANGE NETWORK
GET PAIRING CODE
FINISH

272
 Uploading Files to Frame.io

6 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and en-

ter the pairing code displayed on the camera.
7 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275).

Connecting Using an IP Address

Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB set-
ting profile giving the IP address and other network settings.

1 Select MANUAL. WIRELESS LA

LAN

N Select AUTO to assign the camera an ACCESS PO

P
POINT SETTING
IP ADDRES
ADDRESS
AUTO
SS SETTING 000.000.000.000
IP address automatically. NEXT
MANUAL

Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Enter an IP address. IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY ADDRESS
DNS SERVER ADDRESS

• Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP IP ADDRESS

address. SET

ENTER CANCEL

• Select SUBNET MASK and enter a SUBNET MASK

subnet mask. SET

ENTER CANCEL

273
 • Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and en- GATEWAY ADDRESS

ter a gateway address. SET

ENTER CANCEL

• Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and DNS SERVER ADDRESS

enter a DNS server address. SET

ENTER CANCEL

Connection Status
The status of the connection to Frame.io is
Network/USB Setting Menus

shown by an icon in the electronic viewfinder

or LCD monitor.

Icon Connection status

Connected to Frame.io.
(white)
8 Camera has temporarily suspended upload to
Frame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera
(amber) to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > TRANSFER/
SUSPEND > TRANSFER.

Not connected to Frame.io.

(gray)
Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”.
To restore connection, clear “paused” status using
(red) computer or other device.

274
 Uploading Files to Frame.io

Uploading Items to Frame.io

Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”

1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settings

menu.
2 Select UPLOAD SETTING > SELECT UPLOAD SETTING
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
IMAGE & TRANSFER. AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATE
NETWORK WIRELESS LAN
Frame.io CONNECTED
PROJECT AAAAAAAA
USER AAAAAAAA

N • The NETWORK field shows how the camera is connected to the net-
work and the Frame.io field, the status of the connection to Frame.io.

Network/USB Setting Menus

• The PROJECT and USER fields show information supplied to Frame.
io using a computer or other device. Note that some characters may
not display correctly, in which case they will be replaced by question
marks (“?”).

3 Mark items for upload. SELECT IMAGE

FRAME

Highlight photos and movies and

press MENU/OK to mark them for up-
load.
8
• To switch to the memory card in the SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE

other slot or display only items that SELECT FINISH/SETTING

meet selected criteria, press DISP/

BACK before marking begins.
• To select all items, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two items with the AEL button also selects all
items between them.

275
 4 Press DISP/BACK and select START SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

TRANSFER. START TRANSFER

FILTERING
The selected items will be uploaded SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT

to Frame.io. FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND

START TRANSFER

BACK

Filtering Items/Choosing a Slot

To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only items that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog.
• To display only items that meet selected crite- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

ria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER

• To switch to the memory card in the other slot, FILTERING

SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
Network/USB Setting Menus

BACK

O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items.

• If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud > IMAGE TRANSFER
WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
off.
8

276
 Uploading Files to Frame.io

Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken

Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera
to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for
upload.

Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback

If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark files for up-
load or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1
button during playback.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

277
 Uploading Files via FTP
You can connect the camera to an existing FTP server and
upload pictures via FTP.

Connecting to FTP Servers

• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 278)

• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 281)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to an FTP server via wireless LAN.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE

USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose FTP TRANSFER.
Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Select CREATE NEW. FTP TRANSFER

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

SELECT COMM SETTING
8
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

278
 Uploading Files via FTP

4 Select WIRELESS LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING

TRANSFER IMAGES TO
FTP SERVER VIA WIRELESS LAN

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING

USB
communication setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings. WIRELESS LAN

• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-

Network/USB Setting Menus

ACCESS POINT SETTING
ple Access Point Connections” IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).
7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings, WIRELESS LAN

select NEXT.
ACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

8 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile. SET

ENTER CANCEL

279
 9 When prompted, press MENU/OK and
adjust settings for connection to the FTP SERVER SETTING

FTP server (P 285).

SELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATED

NEXT BACK

10 Save the connection setting profile

when adjustments to settings are EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

complete.
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
Press MENU/OK. CONNECTION SETTING

NEXT BACK

11 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
Network/USB Setting Menus

USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO

USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW

12 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

280
 Uploading Files via FTP

13 Select OK to test the connection.

When a prompt is displayed stating TEST THE CONNECTION?

that the test was successful, press

MENU/OK.
OK
NO
N If the test ends in failure, check the
communication setting profile and
network settings.

14 Choose SELECT to finish creating the SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

connection setting profile. FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

N The connection setting profile can

also be selected later using SELECT SELECT
SKIP
CONNECTION SETTING.

Network/USB Setting Menus

15 Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288).

Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)

Connect to an FTP server via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into

the camera’s LAN connector.
2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and 8
choose FTP TRANSFER.
3 Select CREATE NEW. FTP TRANSFER

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

281
 4 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTING

SELECT COMM SETTING

TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

5 Select WIRED LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING

TRANSFER IMAGES TO
FTP SERVER VIA WIRED LAN

6 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING

USB
communication setting profile. WIFI_1
Network/USB Setting Menus

WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

7 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. IP ADDRESS SETTING

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as- IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO

signed by the network. NEXT

• Select MANUAL to choose the IP

8 address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
8 Select NEXT to proceed after adjust- IP ADDRESS SETTING

ing IP address settings.

IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO
NEXT

282
 Uploading Files via FTP

9 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile. SET

ENTER CANCEL

10 When prompted, press MENU/OK and

adjust settings for connection to the FTP SERVER SETTING

FTP server (P 285).

SELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATED

NEXT BACK

11 Save the connection setting profile

when adjustments to settings are EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

Network/USB Setting Menus

complete.
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
Press MENU/OK. CONNECTION SETTING

NEXT BACK

12 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW 8

13 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

283
 14 Select OK to test the connection.
When a prompt is displayed stating TEST THE CONNECTION?

that the test was successful, press

MENU/OK.
OK
NO
N If the test ends in failure, check the
communication setting profile and
network settings.

15 Choose SELECT to finish creating the SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

connection setting profile. FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

N The connection setting profile can

also be selected later using SELECT SELECT
SKIP
CONNECTION SETTING.
Network/USB Setting Menus

16 Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288).

284
 Uploading Files via FTP

Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers

Adjust settings for connection to the destination FTP server.

1 Select CREATE NEW in the FTP server FTP SERVER SETTING

settings display.
N You can also select or edit existing set- CREATE NEW
tings. CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

2 Choose an FTP server type. FTP SERVER TYPE

FTP
FTPS
SFTP

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Enter the FTP server address. FTP SERVER ADDRESS

SET

ENTER CANCEL

4 Enter the FTP server port number. PORT NUMBER

SET 8

ENTER CANCEL

285
 5 Choose whether to use a proxy serv- PROXY SERVER

er.
In this case we’ll choose DISABLE. ENABLE
DISABLE

N Choose ENABLE to enter the address

and port number for a proxy server.

6 Choose whether to enable PASV PASSIVE MODE

mode.
ENABLE
DISABLE

7 Select USER NAME & PASSWORD. LOGIN

Enter the user name and password

Network/USB Setting Menus

used for login to the FTP server. ANONYMOUS

USER NAME & PASSWORD

N • For connection to servers that do not

require a user name and password,
select ANONYMOUS.
• Selecting FTPS for FTP SERVER
TYPE lets you choose the authen-
tication method. If desired, you can
load a self-signed root certificate
using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING >
8 ROOT CERTIFICATE.

8 Choose the destination folder. SPECIFY TARGET FOLDER

• Choose ROOT FOLDER to upload

pictures to the server’s root direc- ROOT FOLDER
SPECIFY FOLDER
tory.
• To select a different folder, choose
SPECIFY FOLDER.

286
 Uploading Files via FTP

9 Choose the procedure used when OVERWRITE SAME FILE NAME

the destination contains files with

the same names as the pictures se- YES
NO
lected for upload.
• Select YES to overwrite the existing
files.
• Select NO to rename the uploaded
files by adding numbers at the ends
of the file names (e.g., “DSCF0001_
(0).JPG”).
10 Name the FTP server settings. FTP SERVER NAME

The chosen name will appear in the SET

FTP server list.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

287
 Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers
Select pictures for upload to an FTP server.
• Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
(P 288)
• Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (P 290)
• Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback (P 290)
Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
1 Select FTP OPTIONAL SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
2 Choose SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT FILE TYPE
CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
Network/USB Setting Menus

TRANSFER/SUSPEND

SELECT IMAGE AND TRANSFER

TO SELECTED FTP SERVER

3 Select TRANSFER.
SELECT IM
MA & TRANSFER
IMAGE
AUTO IMAG
G TRANSFER ORDER
IMAGE
N If you choose PRIORITY TRANSFER, SELECT FI
IL TYPE
FILE
CAPTION FO
F
TRANSFER
FOR FTP TRANSFER
any pictures you then select will be PRIORITY TRANSFER
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
TRANSFERR/
uploaded to the FTP server before pic- SELECT IMAGE AAND TRANSFER

tures selected using TRANSFER. TO SELECTED FT

FFTP SERVER

8
4 Mark pictures for upload. SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK

to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE

that meet selected criteria, press SELECT FINISH/SETTING

DISP/BACK before marking begins.

• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects
all pictures between them.
288
 Uploading Files via FTP

5 Press DISP/BACK and select START SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

TRANSFER. START TRANSFER

FILTERING
The selected pictures will be upload- SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT

ed to the FTP server. FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND

START TRANSFER

BACK

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot

To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

teria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER

• To switch to the memory card in the other slot, FILTERING

SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

Network/USB Setting Menus

BACK

O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 pictures.

• If ON is selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > IMAGE TRANSFER
WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
off.
8

289
 Uploading Files via FTP

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken

Pictures taken with ON selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING >
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting
menu are automatically marked for upload.

Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback

If b FTP TRANSFER ORDER or c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER
ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1
BUTTON SETTING, you can mark pictures for upload or change
or remove their upload marking using the Fn1 button during
playback.
Network/USB Setting Menus

290
 RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the
camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT

CONNECTION SETTING.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4 Launch X RAW STUDIO.

Network/USB Setting Menus

RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

291
 Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT

CONNECTION SETTING.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Network/USB Setting Menus

Acquire.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

292
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web
Browser
The camera supports remote movie recording. You can
connect to up to four cameras using a web browser on a
computer or tablet and record movies or adjust camera
settings.

Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser

You can connect to the camera from a web browser on a comput-
er or tablet and control it remotely.

Web browser

Network/USB Setting Menus

Wired LAN Wired LAN
(Ethernet)/ (Ethernet)/
wireless LAN wireless LAN

8
Computer/tablet

293
 Before recording movies remotely, you will need to create a con-
nection setting profile for use when connecting the camera to a
computer or tablet via wireless or wired LAN.
• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 294)
• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 299)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the
camera to a computer or tablet via wireless LAN.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE

USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.
2 Select CREATE NEW. REMOTE REC FUNCTION
Network/USB Setting Menus

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

SELECT COMM SETTING

8 SELECT COMM SETTING

TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

4 Select WIRELESS LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN

CONNECT TO NETWORK
VIA WIRELESS LAN

294
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING

USB
connection setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings. WIRELESS LAN

• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim- ACCESS POINT SETTING

ple Access Point Connections” IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).

N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point

(for example, one that operates in the 5 GHz band).

Network/USB Setting Menus

7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings, WIRELESS LAN

select NEXT.
ACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

8 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile. SET
8

ENTER CANCEL

295
 9 Create a user name and password for
use when connecting to the camera USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING

from a computer or tablet.

Press MENU/OK. USER NAME & PASSWORD IS
REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER

NEXT BACK

10 Enter a user name. USER NAME

SET

ENTER CANCEL

11 Enter a password. PASSWORD

SET
Network/USB Setting Menus

ENTER CANCEL

12 Choose a server type. SERVER TYPE

N If you choose HTTPS, you will need HTTP

to import a root certificate into the HTTPS
browser on your computer or tablet
8 (P 298).

13 The camera will display the settings USER NAME

you selected.
Press MENU/OK. PASSWORD

N You will need this information when SERVER TYPE

connecting to the camera from a com-

END EDIT
puter or tablet.

296
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

14 Save the connection setting profile.

Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A

CONNECTION SETTING

NEXT BACK

15 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW

16 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

Network/USB Setting Menus

17 Choose SELECT. SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

N The connection setting profile can FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

also be selected later using SELECT

CONNECTION SETTING. SELECT
SKIP
8

18 Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).

297
 Connecting via HTTPS
If you selected HTTPS for SERVER TYPE, you will need to import a root
certificate into the browser on your computer or tablet. Instructions on
downloading and installing a root certificate are available from the follow-
ing website:

https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/rootcer/
Network/USB Setting Menus

298
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)

Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the
camera to a computer or tablet via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE

USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.
2 Select CREATE NEW. REMOTE REC FUNCTION

CREATE NEW
N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select SELECT FROM LIST

from a list of existing connection set-

ting profiles. CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

Network/USB Setting Menus

SELECT COMM SETTING

SELECT COMM SETTING

TO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT BACK

4 Select WIRED LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING

WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN

CONNECT TO NETWORK 8
VIA WIRELESS LAN

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new COMM SETTING

USB
communication setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3

WIFI_4
files. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

299
 6 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. IP ADDRESS SETTING

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as- IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO

signed by the network. NEXT

• Select MANUAL to choose the IP

address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
7 Select NEXT to proceed after adjust- IP ADDRESS SETTING

ing IP address settings.

IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO
NEXT

8 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

Network/USB Setting Menus

profile. SET

ENTER CANCEL

9 Create a user name and password for

use when connecting to the camera USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING

from a computer or tablet.

8 Press MENU/OK. USER NAME & PASSWORD IS
REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER

NEXT BACK

10 Enter a user name. USER NAME

SET

ENTER CANCEL

300
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

11 Enter a password. PASSWORD

SET

ENTER CANCEL

12 Choose a server type. SERVER TYPE

N If you choose HTTPS, you will need HTTP

to import a root certificate into the HTTPS
browser on your computer or tablet
(P 298).

13 The camera will display the settings USER NAME

you selected.

Network/USB Setting Menus

Press MENU/OK. PASSWORD

N You will need this information when SERVER TYPE

connecting to the camera from a com-

END EDIT
puter or tablet.

14 Save the connection setting profile.

Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A

CONNECTION SETTING
8
NEXT BACK

15 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

CREATE NEW

301
 16 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

17 Choose SELECT. SETTING COMPLETE

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING

N The connection setting profile can FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

also be selected later using SELECT

CONNECTION SETTING. SELECT
SKIP

18 Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).

Network/USB Setting Menus

302
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet

Connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer or
tablet.
N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point (for
example, one that operates in the 5 GHz band).

Connecting the first camera

Connect by using a web browser to enter the IP address or using
a camera app to scan the QR code displayed by the camera.
Connecting using an IP address

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/

USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.

Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Launch a web browser on your com- XXXXXXXXX.........
puter or tablet and enter the cam-
era’s IP address in the address bar.
To connect to a camera with an IP
address of 192.168.0.11, for example,
enter “http://192.168.0.11”.
3 An entry screen appears. Enter the
user name and password.
The remote recording display will ap-
Please sign-in to the camera

USER NAME:
8
PASSWORD:

pear in the browser. OK Cancel

303
 Connecting by scanning a QR code

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/

USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.

2 Launch the camera application on the tablet and scan the

QR code.
The web browser launches, and the remote recording display
appears.

Connecting a second or subsequent camera

Either enter the IP address in the remote recording display in the
web browser or scan the QR code to connect.
N When you connect a second or subsequent camera, set the same
Network/USB Setting Menus

SERVER TYPE as the first camera beforehand (P 298).

Connecting using an IP address

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/

USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.
2 Click or tap the thumbnail of the +
mark in the “Choose camera” area of
8 the remote recording display.

3 An entry screen appears. Enter the

camera’s IP address and an account Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in

Address:
name and password. USER NAME
E:
Connect via QR Code

The remote recording display will ap- PASS

PASSWORD:
PASSWO
ASSWO
S

OK Cancel

pear in the browser.

304
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting by scanning a QR code

N To connect a second or subsequent camera by scanning a QR code, set
SERVER TYPE of the first camera and second and subsequent cameras
to HTTPS in advance.

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/

USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.
2 Tap the thumbnail of the + mark in
the “Choose camera” area.

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Tap “Connect via QR Code” to scan
the QR code displayed by the cam- Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in

Address:
era. USER NAME
E:
Connect via QR Code

The remote recording display will ap- PASSW

PASSWO
PASSWORD:
S

OK Cancel

pear in the browser.

Disconnecting a second or subsequent camera

To end a connection after adding a camera, select the “remove connected
device” option in the “Remote recording” menu and click or tap the thumb-
nail for the camera you want to remove. 8

305
 The Remote Recording Display
The controls available in the remote recording display are de-
tailed below.
N The display layout varies with the size of the computer or tablet screen,
among other factors.

Overview

A
A
Network/USB Setting Menus

B
J
I H GF E D C
8

306
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Item Description
A Camera settings Adjust settings for the current camera.
Choose the camera or cameras to which the
B Choose for REC/STOP selected action (starting or stopping recording)
will apply.
C STOP button Stop movie recording.
D REC button Start movie recording.
A list of thumbnails showing the views through
E Choose camera the lenses of the connected cameras. Click or
tap a thumbnail to select a camera to control.
Check button for movies in View the movies on the memory card in the
F memory card current camera.
Adjust (advanced) settings for the current
G Camera settings (advanced) camera.
Enable or disable the controls in the remote

Network/USB Setting Menus

H Screen lock button recording display.
I Display mode button Switch displays.
J Remote recording menu Adjust remote recording settings (P 309).
Lock or unlock the current camera, enabling or
K Camera lock button disabling its controls.

N If you end the connection to a camera while it is locked, its controls will
remain disabled, in which case you will need to turn the camera off.

307
 Choose Camera
The views through the lenses of the connected cameras are
shown in a thumbnail list. Click or tap a thumbnail to select a
camera to control.
A B
B

D C

Setting Description
The remaining recording time. When the time
Network/USB Setting Menus

A Recording time available remaining grows short, the thumbnail will flash
and the recording time will be displayed in red.
Camera storage settings. The icon for the
current slot is shown in orange. The display
B Card slot options turns red if the camera is unable to record to
the current card.
The battery level. The thumbnail will flash
C Battery level when the battery runs low.
A frame appears around the thumbnail for the
8 current camera. Regardless of whether they are
D Thumbnail frame currently selected, cameras that are currently
recording are highlighted in red or, during
high-speed recording, in green.

308
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Remote Recording Menu

Adjust remote recording settings.
Show histogram
Hide or view the histogram.
Show microphone level
Hide or view the microphone recording level.
Show WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Hide or view the waveform/vectorscope (P 190).
Show tool bar
Hide or view the browser toolbar.
Display with Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority
Choose how you prefer the view through the lens to be dis-

Network/USB Setting Menus

played, giving priority either to image quality or to ensuring that
the picture updates in real time.
N • Prioritizing image quality maximizes image quality but may result in
display lag.
• Prioritizing real-time display keeps display lag to a minimum regard-
less of such factors as connection speed.
Light mode/Dark mode
Switch between the light- and dark-mode remote recording dis-
8
plays.
Stop the camera connection
Click or tap a thumbnail in the “Choose camera” area to end the
connection to the selected camera.

309
 Recording Movies Remotely
Start recording on one or more remote cameras or end recording
on selected cameras without ending recording on others.

1 The cameras to which the chosen action (starting or stop-

ping recording) will apply can be selected in the “Choose for
REC/STOP” area.
Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the
“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected
cameras will be highlighted.
2 Click or tap the “REC button”.
The selected cameras will start recording and their thumb-
nails will be highlighted in color.
3 To end recording, select the desired cameras in the “Choose
Network/USB Setting Menus

for REC/STOP” area.

Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the
“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected
cameras will be highlighted.
4 Click or tap the “STOP button”.
The selected cameras will stop recording.

Viewing Movies
8
View movies recorded to the camera memory card.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.

2 Click or tap the “Check button for movies in memory card”.

The files on the camera memory card will be displayed.

310
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Saving and Loading Camera Settings

Save settings for connected cameras to the computer or tablet or
load previously-saved settings.

Saving Camera Settings

Save camera settings to a settings file on the computer or tablet.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.

2 Select “Backup” in the “Camera set-

tings (advanced)” menu.
Backup

3 Click or tap “Save settings”.

Network/USB Setting Menus

Settings for the selected camera will be saved to a settings
file on the computer or tablet.

Loading Saved Settings

Load saved settings onto a selected camera.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.

2 Select “Restore” in the “Camera set- 8

tings (advanced)” menu.
Restore

3 Select the desired settings file and click or tap “Load settings”.
The settings will be copied to the selected camera.

N • The location and procedure for loading files varies with the computer
or tablet.
• Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used.

311
 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Copying Settings to Other Cameras

Settings can be copied to multiple cameras simultaneously.

1 Select the source camera in the “Choose camera” area.

2 Select “Copy” in the “Camera settings

(advanced)” menu.
Copy

3 Select the destination cameras and

click or tap “Copy”. Copy
The settings currently in effect on the
source camera will be copied to the
destination cameras.
Network/USB Setting Menus

N Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used.

312
 Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings from NETWORK/USB SETTING

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING

the shooting or playback display, press SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
setting) tab. Frame.io Camera to Cloud
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
EXIT

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING

Create or edit connection setting profiles.

CREATE USING WIZARD

Choose network/USB and communication settings for a connec-

Network/USB Setting Menus

tion setting profile.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING

SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD CREATE USING WIZARD

EDIT/CHECK
in the network/USB setting menu.
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

313
 2 Choose the desired network/USB set- CREATE USING WIZARD
SMARTPHONE APP
tings. USB CARD READER
WEBCAM
PRINTER PRINT
TETHER SHOOTING

CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP

N To use any of the following pre-existing connection setting pro-

files, choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
• 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
• 2: USB CARD READER
• 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
• 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
• 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
• 6: USB WEBCAM
Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Select CREATE NEW. TETHER SHOOTING

Choosing a tethered photography CREATE NEW

SELECT FROM LIST
option displays the options shown.
To create a new profile, select CREATE CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
NEW. USING WIZARD

4 Adjust network/USB settings.

For more information, refer to the section on the setting in
8 question.
• “Tethered Photography” (P 260)
• “Uploading Pictures via FTP“ (P 278)
• “Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser“ (P 293)
N Saved connection setting profiles are marked by icons indicating the
communication setting profile.

314
 Network/USB Setting Menus

EDIT/CHECK
View or edit existing connection setting profiles.
N The instructions that follow are devoted chiefly to choosing commu-
nication settings for connection setting profiles used in tethered pho-
tography.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING

SETTING > EDIT/CHECK in the net- CREATE USING WIZARD

EDIT/CHECK
work/USB setting menu.
EDIT AND CHECK EXISTING
CONNECTION SETTING

2 Choose a connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
N Options 1 to 6 (1: UNIVERSAL SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
to 6: USB WEBCAM) are not available. USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM
NISHIAZABU STUDIO
NOT CREATED

3 Select EDIT/CHECK. SELECT CONNECTION

N
UNIV
SETTING

• To copy an existing connection set- USB

USB
B
B
EDIT / CHECK
ting profile, select COPY. Choosing USBB
COPY
CONNECTION TEST
USBB
an existing profile as the destina- USBB
ERASE

tion overwrites the profile selected NISHIAZABU

NIS
SH STUDIO
NOT CREATED 8
in Step 2.
• To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.
• To delete the selected connection setting profile, select
ERASE.

315
 4 Select COMM SETTING. 7: STUDIO_TETHER

2: WiFi_STUDIO

FINISH
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
COMM SETTING
FTP SERVER SETTING
REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING

N • To rename the connection setting profile, select EDIT

CONNECTION SETTING NAME.
• If the chosen connection setting profile is for FTP upload, select
FTP SERVER SETTING to view or edit settings for connection to
the FTP server (P 285).
• If the chosen connection setting profile is for the remote record
function, select REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING to view or
edit settings for remote movie recording (P 296, 301).

5 Choose an existing communication COMM SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB
setting profile. WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N To create a new profile, select CREATE WIFI_3

WIFI_4
NEW. WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

6 Select EDIT/CHECK. COMM SETTING

TIN
USB
• To save the selected communica- WIFI_1
WIFI__1
WIFI_2
WIFI__2
SELECT
EDIT / CHECK
tion setting profile to the current WIFI_3
WIFI__3
COPY
ERASE
8 connection setting profile, choose WIFI__4
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
WIFI_
_5
CONNECTION TEST

SELECT. CREATE
CREA
CREA
AT NEW
CREATE
ATE NEW

• To copy an existing communication setting profile, select

COPY. Choosing an existing profile as the destination over-
writes the profile selected in Step 5.
• To delete the selected communication setting profile, se-
lect ERASE. Deleting a communication setting profile saved
to a connection setting profile also deletes the connection
setting profile.
• To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.
316
 Network/USB Setting Menus

7 Review the settings displayed and se- 2: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3

NETWORK TYPE WIRELESS LAN
lect END to proceed without making SECURITY TYPE WPA3
SSID 123456789
changes. To edit settings, press the IP ADDRESS SETTING MANUAL
IP ADDRESS 255.255.255.255
focus stick (focus lever) to the right. SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.255

You can now edit the communica- GATEWAY ADDRESS 255.255.255.255

DNS SERVER ADDRESS ABCDEFGHIJK
tion setting profile as described in END EDIT

“Simple Access Point Connections”

(P 264) and “Connecting Using an
IP Address” (P 265).
8 After editing the communication set- WIRELESS LAN

ting profile, select NEXT.

ACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

Network/USB Setting Menus

9 Name the communication setting COMM SETTING NAME

profile. SET

ENTER CANCEL

10 Choose SELECT to save the edited

communication setting profile to the 8: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3
SELECT THIS COMM SETTING?
8
current connection setting profile.
SELECT
SKIP

11 Select FINISH to end editing. 7: STUDIO_TETHER

2: WiFi_STUDIO

FINISH
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
COMM SETTING
FTP SERVER SETTING
REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING

317
 SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
Select a connection setting profile.
Profile Description
Connect using the smartphone app or print pictures on
1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
instax printers.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via
2: USB CARD READER
USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
3: USB TETHER Control the camera and take photographs remotely.
SHOOTING AUTO • Select 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO to au-
tomatically enable tethered photography when the
computer to which the camera is connected is turned
on. Tethered photography is disabled while the com-
4: USB TETHER puter is off.
SHOOTING FIXED • If 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected,
the camera will continue to function in tethered pho-
Network/USB Setting Menus

tography mode even when not connected to a com-

puter.
Harness the power of the camera’s image processing en-
5: USB RAW CONV./
gine when processing RAW pictures on a computer, or
BACKUP RESTORE
save or load camera settings.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
6: USB WEBCAM
webcam.
7–16: User-created Use network/USB settings saved using CREATE/EDIT
profiles CONNECTION SETTING.
8

318
 Network/USB Setting Menus

Choosing a Connection Setting Profile

Follow the steps below to use pre-existing or user-created con-
nection setting profiles.

1 Choose SELECT CONNECTION NETWORK/USB SETTING

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
SETTING in the network/USB setting SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 7:STUDIO
AIRPLANE MODE
menu. Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
EXIT

2 Choose the desired connection set- SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
ting profile. USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

Network/USB Setting Menus

NISHIAZABU STUDIO

AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth
features.
Options
ON OFF
8

319
 Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smart-
phone-related settings.
N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the
smartphone app.

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smart-
phone app has been installed.

SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION

Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the cam-
era has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
Network/USB Setting Menus

DELETE PAIRING REG.

Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.
N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.
Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the
smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.
8

320
 Network/USB Setting Menus

Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with
paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
ON OFF

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
Options
ON OFF

SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.

Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from

Network/USB Setting Menus

paired smartphones or tablets.
Options
ON OFF

O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is

running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not
been updated for over 30 minutes.

NAME 8
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless
network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).

321
 IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to
paired smartphones or tablets even while off.
Options
ON OFF

RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE

Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing file
size for upload.
Options
ON T ON U OFF

N • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected.

• Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M. When
Network/USB Setting Menus

the setting is ON T or ON U, images are compressed to about 12

megapixels or 6 megapixels, respectively. The size after compression
differs by the aspect ratio of the image.

WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING

Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)
8
O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band is
permitted before selecting the 5 GHz option.
• The options available vary with the country or region of sale.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.

322
 Network/USB Setting Menus

instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING

Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE
printers.

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password

The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.

Frame.io Camera to Cloud

Adjust settings for use with Frame.io.

Network/USB Setting Menus

CONNECT
Connect to Frame.io.
Option Description
WIRELESS LAN Connect via wireless LAN.
WIRED LAN Connect via wired LAN.
View the pairing code for connection to the Frame.io proj-
GET PAIRING CODE
ect.
8
N The pairing code can only be viewed when the camera is connected
to Frame.io.

DISCONNECT
End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the
network connection.

323
 SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of files uploaded to Frame.io. You can select or
deselect each file type individually.
Options
MOV - PROXY MOV - ProRes OTHER MOV/MP4 JPEG
RAW HEIF TIFF

UPLOAD SETTING
Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload.
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for upload
Network/USB Setting Menus

as they are taken.

Options
ON OFF
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume upload to Frame.io.
Options
8 TRANSFER SUSPEND

324
 Network/USB Setting Menus

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

If ON is selected, upload of files to Frame.io will continue while
the camera is off.
Options
ON OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a root certificate to the camera for use with Frame.io.
Option Description
LOAD FROM STORAGE
Copy the root certificate from the camera memory card.
MEDIA
DELETE Delete the current root certificate.

N Frame.io and FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > ROOT CERTIFICATE use the

Network/USB Setting Menus

same root certificate. Changing one changes the other.

UPLOAD STATUS
View Frame.io upload status.

TRANSFER QUEUE
View a list of the files awaiting upload.

RESET TRANSFER ORDER

Remove upload marking from all files selected for upload to 8
Frame.io.

325
 FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
Adjust settings for FTP upload.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

Mark picture for upload (P 288).

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

Select ON to automatically mark pictures for upload as they are
taken.
Options
ON OFF

SELECT FILE TYPE

Choose the types of files uploaded to the FTP server. You can se-
Network/USB Setting Menus

lect or deselect each file type individually.

Options
JPEG RAW HEIF TIFF MOV MP4

CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER

Add captions to photos and movies during upload.
Option Description
8 Add the caption selected for D SAVE DATA SETTING >
DEFAULT CAPTION
DEFAULT CAPTION.
CREATED CAPTION Create new captions or select existing captions.
NO CAPTION Do not add captions to pictures during upload.

TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume FTP upload.
Options
TRANSFER SUSPEND

326
 Network/USB Setting Menus

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

If ON is selected, upload of pictures to the FTP server will contin-
ue while the camera is off.
Options
ON OFF

FTP POWER SAVING

If ON is selected, the network feature will turn off to save power
when the upload of all pictures currently marked for transfer is
complete. Marking additional pictures for upload turns the net-
work feature on again.
Options
ON OFF

Network/USB Setting Menus

ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a unique root certificate to the camera for use when FTPS is
selected for FTP SERVER TYPE (P 285).
Option Description
LOAD FROM MEMORY
Copy the root certificate from the camera memory card.
CARD
DELETE Delete the current root certificate.
8
N FTP upload and Frame.io Camera to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING >
ROOT CERTIFICATE use the same root certificate. Changing one
changes the other.

RESET FTP TRANSFER ORDER

Remove upload marking from all pictures selected for upload to
the FTP server in the current connection setting profile.

327
 USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,
or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
Option Description
The camera switches between power delivery and data trans-
AUTO
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
COMM OFF the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
OFF/COMM ON the connected device.

O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from

devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
Network/USB Setting Menus

may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.

N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the
camera is off.

328
 Network/USB Setting Menus

INFORMATION
View network-related settings.
Option Description
View the camera’s wireless and wired LAN Mac addresses and
HARDWARE INFO
IP addresses, and Bluetooth MAC address.
TRANSFER ORDER View upload progress and the destination for files uploaded to
STATUS Frame.io or via FTP.
ERROR View the content of errors when a C or B icon is displayed
DESCRIPTION (P 457).

RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING

Reset network/USB settings to default values.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

329
MEMO

330
The Setup Menus

331
 USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press USER SETTING
FORMAT
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and bAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
choose USER SETTING. TIME DIFFERENCE

x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
EXIT

FORMAT
To format a memory card or USB-connected SSD:

1 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.

2 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.
N An SSD connected to the USB connector can also be selected.
3 A confirmation dialog will be dis- FORMAT

FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?

played. To format the memory card,
The Setup Menus

ERASE ALL DATA

highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

N To exit without formatting the memory OK
CANCEL
card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.

O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the

9 memory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a comput-
er or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding
the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the
b (Delete) button.

332
 USER SETTING

b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.

AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option Description
ON Daylight saving time on.
OFF Daylight saving time off.

DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:

1 Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. To change the order in which the year, month, and

The Setup Menus

day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the
focus stick up or down.

3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

333
 TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
difference between your local and home time zone:
O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before select-
ing a local time zone using g LOCAL.

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time
zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.
N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
g LOCAL h HOME

N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three

The Setup Menus

seconds when the camera is turned on.

334
 USER SETTING

Qa
Choose a language.

x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 377).

F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 377).

The Setup Menus

335
 SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option Description
OK Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-
era turns off in playback mode).

N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed

using a blower (P 438).

BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a BATTERY AGE

number between 0 and 4. The higher the

number, the older the battery.
The Setup Menus

N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.

336
 USER SETTING

RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Option Description
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and

press MENU/OK.

REGULATORY

The Setup Menus

To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.

337
 SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, SOUND SETTING
AF BEEP VOL.
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
SOUND SET-UP. FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
EXIT

AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.

Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus

Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

338
 SOUND SETTING

OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-
trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

F REC START/STOP VOLUME

Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

The Setup Menus

339
 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND

Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
The Setup Menus

340
 SOUND SETTING

PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
Options
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK

Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option Description
The camera plays audio recorded via external micro-
XLR
phones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
CAMERA microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.

N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).

The Setup Menus

341
 SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK, SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF COLOR
SCREEN SET-UP. EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT

VIEW MODE SETTING

Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 20).

EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Option Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
AUTO
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
MANUAL
The Setup Menus

and +5.

EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Options
9 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

342
 SCREEN SETTING

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

(focus lever).

SET CANCEL

2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

343
 LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).

2 Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus

344
 SCREEN SETTING

IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
CONTINUOUS
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
0.5 SEC button is pressed halfway.
OFF Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.

• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
ON OFF

The Setup Menus

345
 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a flash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-
tion in situations in which both exposure and white balance
OFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.

NATURAL LIVE VIEW

Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option Description
The effects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-
ON to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will differ from
The Setup Menus

those in the final picture. The display will however be adjusted

to show the effects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings
OFF
can be previewed in the monitor.

346
 SCREEN SETTING

F-Log VIEW ASSIST

Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON OFF

ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING

Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 27).

FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
F GRID 9 G GRID 24 H HD FRAMING
Display

The Setup Menus

P P P

For “rule of thirds” compo- A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the

sition. crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.

N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 25). 9

347
 AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON OFF

PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION
Choose the zoom ratio selected when the center of the rear com-
mand dial is pressed during playback.
Option Description
2x (FROM CENTER) View the center area of the picture at the selected zoom
4x (FROM CENTER) ratio. Regardless of the setting selected, pictures will not be
8x (FROM CENTER) displayed at greater than actual size.
ACTUAL SIZE View the picture at actual size, centered on the focus area.
(FROM FOCUS POINT) The zoom ratio varies with the size of the image.
Display each picture at the same zoom ratio as the previous
PREVIOUS MAG.
picture, starting at the center of the image. Pictures will not,
(FROM CENTER)
however, be displayed at greater than actual size.

FOCUS SCALE UNITS

The Setup Menus

Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.

Options
METERS FEET

348
 SCREEN SETTING

DUAL DISPLAY SETTING

Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option Description
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.

EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION

Choose the magnification of the full-screen EVF display.
Options
1.00x 0.94x 0.89x 0.83x

N The screen magnification cannot be changed when D POWER

MANAGEMENT > PERFORMANCE is either EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (120P) or EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.). With
these settings, the screen magnification is set to 0.77x.

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING

Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display

The Setup Menus

(P 25).

349
 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfind-
er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5

OFF ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE

INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 17).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the

button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 385).
The Setup Menus

350
 SCREEN SETTING

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)

Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-
dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE

INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the

button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 385).

The Setup Menus

351
 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Expo. DISP.
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > Scale
L1
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or L2
L3
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). L4
R1
R2

Option Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
A Expo. DISP. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
B d Scale Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
C L1, L2, L3, L4
of the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
D R1, R2, R3, R4
side of the screen.

INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.

Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus

Option Description
HIGH CONTRAST High contrast.
STANDARD Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.

352
 SCREEN SETTING

LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smart-
phone.
Options
ON OFF

SUB MONITOR SETTING

Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording. Choose from the following:
Option Description
Display camera settings. You can choose the settings
INFORMATION
displayed.
DIALS Display dials showing ISO sensitivity and shutter speed.
HISTOGRAM Display a histogram.

N You can switch between displays by pressing the secondary LCD mon-
itor mode button.

The INFORMATION Display

The Setup Menus

Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the
INFORMATION display.

1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the

setup menu.

2 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 9

3 Highlight INFORMATION and press SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)

MENU/OK.
INFORMATION
DIALS
HISTOGRAM

353
 4 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING INFORMATION(STILL)
dScale
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
ISO
SHOOTING MODE
IMAGE SIZE
WHITE BALANCE
FILM SIMULATION

5 Highlight the indicator you wish to DISPLAY 1 SETTING

SHUTTER SPEED
display and press MENU/OK. APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
WHITE BALANCE
NONE

Still Photography Mode

Choose from:
• SHUTTER SPEED • IMAGE QUALITY
• APERTURE • SHUTTER TYPE
• EXPO. COMP. • FILM SIMULATION
The Setup Menus

• ISO • DYNAMIC RANGE

• SHOOTING MODE • 35mm FORMAT MODE
• PHOTOMETRY • BOOST MODE
• DRIVE MODE • DUAL IS MODE
• FOCUS MODE • SELF-TIMER
• WHITE BALANCE • COMMUNICATION STATUS
9 • IMAGE SIZE • NONE

354
 SCREEN SETTING

Movie Mode
Choose from:
• TIME CODE • FOCUS MODE
• REMAINING TIME/REC. TIME • WHITE BALANCE
• REMAINING TIME • FILM SIMULATION
• REC. TIME • DYNAMIC RANGE
• SHUTTER SPEED • IMAGE FORMAT
• APERTURE • BOOST MODE
• EXPO. COMP. • DUAL IS MODE
• ISO • SELF-TIMER
• SHOOTING MODE • COMMUNICATION STATUS
• PHOTOMETRY • NONE
6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators.
N The d Scale indicator can only be enabled
or disabled.

The Setup Menus

d Scale

355
 SCREEN SETTING

SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR

Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
Option Description
BLACK Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
WHITE Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.

N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD moni-

tor backlight is on.

x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK

F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
The Setup Menus

Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK

356
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK, BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose xEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S. OPERATION
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
EXIT

FOCUS LEVER SETTING

Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever).
Option Description
LOCK (OFF) The focus stick cannot be used during shooting.
Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick
PUSH n TO UNLOCK
to select a focus point.
Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus
ON
point.

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU

The Setup Menus

Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still pho-
tography (P 379).

F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU

Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 379).
9

357
 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 385).

COMMAND DIAL SETTING

Choose the roles played by the command dials.
Option Description
FRONT COMMAND Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aper-
DIAL 1 ture (APERTURE) * to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
FRONT COMMAND Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aper-
DIAL 2 ture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE)
FRONT COMMAND
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
DIAL 3.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aper-
REAR COMMAND ture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
DIAL COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to
the rear command dial.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using either or
EXP. COMPENSATION
both of the front and rear command dials while the function
ASSIGNMENT
button assigned to exposure compensation is pressed.
The Setup Menus

* Aperture ring rotated to A or C in mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).

N • COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and

holding the center of the front command dial.
• You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT
COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.
9

358
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

o S.S. OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the com-
mand dials.
Options
ON OFF

COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION

Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.

SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option Description

The Setup Menus

• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
AF-S • OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
AF-C
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but- 9
ton is pressed halfway.

359
 SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be ad-
justed separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual fo-
cus).
Options
ON OFF

N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.

SHOOT WITHOUT LENS

Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-
tached.
Options
ON OFF

SHOOT WITHOUT CARD

Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
The Setup Menus

Option Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
ON test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
OFF
9 accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.

360
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

FOCUS RING
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-
crease the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)

FOCUS RING OPERATION

Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-
ment of the focus ring.
Option Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-
LINEAR tated, but the focusing speed is unaffected by the speed the ring
is rotated.

AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option Description

The Setup Menus

AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-
SWITCH main locked until it is pressed again.

361
 AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance
(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at
the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
Option Description
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
SWITCH the lock.

EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING

Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button
to which exposure compensation is assigned. If d ON WHEN
PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted
by holding the button while rotating dial; if d ON/OFF SWITCH
is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the
button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button
again.
The Setup Menus

Options
d ON WHEN PRESSING d ON/OFF SWITCH

362
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING

Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
Option Description
Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer. If the
a SMARTPHONE
camera is not currently paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/
TRANSFER ORDER
SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed.
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
d SELECT & selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
SMARTPHONE is paired (P 233). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
b FTP Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to an
TRANSFER ORDER FTP server.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority upload
c FTP PRIORITY
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
TRANSFER ORDER
upload queue.
HFrame.io Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to
TRANSFER ORDER Frame.io.
r WIRELESS
The button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATION

The Setup Menus

363
 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.

x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING

Option Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
OFF Touch controls disabled.

x DOUBLE TAP SETTING

Option Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
ON
shooting.
OFF Touch zoom disabled.

c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option Description
ON Enable touch-function gestures.
OFF Disable touch-function gestures.
The Setup Menus

a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING

Option Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
9

364
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS

Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option Description
6 All.
0 Right half.
2 Top right quarter.
4 Bottom right quarter.
1 Left half.
3 Top left quarter.
5 Bottom left quarter.
OFF Touch controls disabled.

LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option Description
Choose from the following:
• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.

The Setup Menus

LOCK SETTING •
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
SELECTION chosen for LOCK SETTING. 9

N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any

time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.

365
 POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings, POWER MANAGEMENT

press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. SHOOTING STAND BY MODE
AUTO POWER SAVE
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

EXIT

AUTO POWER OFF

Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automati-
cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF
The Setup Menus

366
 POWER MANAGEMENT

PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and EVF display performance.
Option Description
Boost camera focus and EVF display performance. The battery
drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
You can choose to assign priority to:
• AF PRIORITY - NORMAL: Focus speed.
• AF PRIORITY - LOW LIGHT: Focus speed while adjusting EVF
and LCD brightness to make objects in shadows easier to see.
Some ghosting may be visible with blurred images.
• EVF RESOLUTION PRIORITY: Viewfinder resolution.
• EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P): The refresh rate for the
EVF is increased, smoothing motion.

BOOST
• EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.): The refresh rate
for the EVF is increased beyond EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY
(120P) smoothing motion still further. The EVF may darken.
N • Regardless of the option selected, the camera func-
tions in AF PRIORITY - NORMAL mode while the
monitor is on.
• The D SCREEN SET-UP > EVF FULL SCREEN
MAGNIFICATION setting cannot be changed when

The Setup Menus

either EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) or EVF
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.) is set. With
these settings, the screen magnification is set to
0.77x.
Choose for standard focus and EVF display performance and bat-
NORMAL
tery endurance.
9

367
 POWER MANAGEMENT

SHOOTING STAND BY MODE

Choose the delay before the camera enters shooting standby
mode.
Option Description
5 MIN
2 MIN The camera will suspend all functions and enter power-
1 MIN ing-saving (standby) mode if no operations are performed
30 SEC for the selected period.
15 SEC
OFF Shooting standby mode disabled.

AUTO POWER SAVE

If ON is selected, the display frame rate will drop to save power if
no operations are performed for a short period, but the normal
frame rate can be restored by operating camera controls.
Options
ON OFF

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

The Setup Menus

If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will first
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, auto-
matically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
Option Description
9 The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
STANDARD
reaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
HIGH with the camera at these high temperatures could result
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.

368
 SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings, SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, EDIT FILE NAME
xCARD SLOT SETTING
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDER
COPYRIGHT INFO
DEFAULT CAPTION
IPTC
EXIT

FRAME NO.
New pictures are stored in image files named Frame number
using a four-digit file number assigned by
adding one to the last file number used. The
file number is displayed during playback as Directory File
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file num-
bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option Description
Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first

The Setup Menus

CONTINUOUS available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
RENEW
memory card is inserted.

N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be

disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card 9
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.

369
 EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option Default prefix Sample file name
sRGB DSCF ABCD0001
AdobeRGB _DSF _ABC0001

x CARD SLOT SETTING

Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
SEQUENTIAL
first slot is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the first slot and
JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This op-
SEPARATE tion only takes effect when SUPER FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW
or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
The Setup Menus

SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
9

370
 SAVE DATA SETTING

SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
SELECT FOLDER stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to
highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a five-character folder name. The new folder will be
CREATE FOLDER created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.

COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.
Option Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies

The Setup Menus

DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not affected.

371
 DEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.

DISPLAY
View the current caption.

EDIT
Enter a caption.

ERASE
Delete the current caption.

IPTC
Choose IPTC metadata applied to new photos.

EMBED IPTC
If ON is selected, IPTC metadata is embedded in new photos.
Options
ON OFF
The Setup Menus

EDIT/CHECK
Enter IPTC metadata or check IPTC metadata that is currently reg-
istered.

RESET
9
Delete metadata that is currently registered.

372
 SAVE DATA SETTING

GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
ON OFF

The Setup Menus

373
MEMO

374
Shortcuts

375
 Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-
tom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-
tion gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option Description P
Add frequently-used options to this custom
“My menu” menu, which can be viewed by pressing 377
MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options 379
selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to
The function buttons 385
selected features.
Use touch function button flick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to 390
gestures
selected features.
Shortcuts

10

376
 MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the MY MENU

SELF-TIMER
shooting display and select the E (MY INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
MENU) tab. GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
EXIT

O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to

MY MENU.

MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USER MY MENU SETTING

SETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or

ADD ITEMS
F MY MENU SETTING. RANK ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS

N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.

To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up xMY MENU SETTING

IMAGE SIZE
or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
press MENU/OK. Options that can be SELECT JPEG/HEIF Shortcuts
FILM SIMULATION
added to “my menu” are highlighted MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

in blue. GRAIN EFFECT

COLOR CHROME EFFECT
OK SELECT CANCEL

N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks. 10

377
 MY MENU

3 Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.

Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selec-
tion screen.

4 Select a menu to be registered next SELECT ITEM LOCATION

1 IMAGE SIZE
and press the MENU/OK button. Select 2 IMAGE QUALITY

the order of the menus to be regis-

tered and press the MENU/OK button.

MOVE SAVE

5 Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”.

To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button.
N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
Shortcuts

10

378
 The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Q button.

The Quick Menu Display

The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:

Still photography

SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A SHOOTING MODE I HIGHLIGHT TONE
B ISO J SHADOW TONE
Shortcuts

C DYNAMIC RANGE K COLOR

D WHITE BALANCE L SHARPNESS
E HIGH ISO NR M SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTION 10
F IMAGE SIZE N
SETTING
G IMAGE QUALITY O SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
H FILM SIMULATION P FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.
379
 Movie recording

SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A SHOOTING MODE I FILM SIMULATION
B SHUTTER SPEED J DYNAMIC RANGE
C IMAGE FORMAT K MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
D WHITE BALANCE L F IS MODE
APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED g FACE/EYE DETECTION
E M
CONTROL oL) SETTING
F MOVIE ISO N SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
G O BIT RATE
ASPECT RATIO
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
H P WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Shortcuts

(WHEN k SELECTED)
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.
10

380
 The Quick Menu

Viewing and Changing Settings

1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to SHOOTING MODE

PROGRAM AE

highlight items and rotate the rear

command dial to change.

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.

3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete.

Shortcuts
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 385). 10
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.

381
 Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during

shooting.

N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photogra-
phy and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.

2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick
(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and
press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.

The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
Shortcuts

10

382
 The Quick Menu

Available Items (Still Photography)

Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE • AF MODE
• IMAGE QUALITY • AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FILM SIMULATION • g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
• GRAIN EFFECT • SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • MF ASSIST
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • SELF-TIMER
• DYNAMIC RANGE • PHOTOMETRY
• D RANGE PRIORITY • SHUTTER TYPE
• WHITE BALANCE • FLICKER REDUCTION
• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. • ISO
(WHEN k SELECTED) • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• HIGHLIGHT TONE • FLASH COMPENSATION
• SHADOW TONE • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
• COLOR • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• SHARPNESS • EVF/LCD COLOR
• CLARITY • NONE
• HIGH ISO NR
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10

383
 The Quick Menu

Available Items (Movies)

• FILM SIMULATION • MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• DYNAMIC RANGE • BIT RATE
• WHITE BALANCE • HIGH SPEED REC
• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. • F SELF-TIMER
(WHEN k SELECTED) • MOVIE AF MODE
• HIGHLIGHT TONE • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• SHADOW TONE • F IS MODE
• COLOR • F IS MODE BOOST
• SHARPNESS • SHUTTER SPEED
• HIGH ISO NR • APERTURE
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
• MF ASSIST • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE ADJUSTMENT
• PHOTOMETRY • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
• MOVIE ISO • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• IMAGE FORMAT • EVF/LCD COLOR
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT • NONE
RATIO

N To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10

384
 Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.

The Function Buttons

Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-
lected feature.

Function Button Defaults

The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons

Shortcuts

Function buttons Default

A AFON button AF-ON
B Center of rear command dial FOCUS CHECK
C Q (quick menu) button QUICK MENU 10
D AEL (exposure lock) button AE LOCK ONLY

385
 Front-of-Camera Function Buttons

Function buttons Default

A Fn1 button FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
B Fn2 button SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
C Fn3 button EXPO. COMP.
D Fn4 button SUB MONITOR MODE
E Fn5 button PERFORMANCE
F Fn6 button ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
Shortcuts

10

386
 Function Controls

Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons

The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING op-
tion in the setup menu.
• EXPO. COMP. • ISO
• IMAGE SIZE • IS MODE
• IMAGE QUALITY • 35mm FORMAT MODE
• RAW • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FILM SIMULATION • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• GRAIN EFFECT • TTL-LOCK
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • MODELING FLASH
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • HIGH SPEED REC
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • F SELF-TIMER
• DYNAMIC RANGE • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• D RANGE PRIORITY • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
• WHITE BALANCE • F IS MODE BOOST
• CLARITY • ZEBRA SETTING
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • COOLING FAN SETTING
• FOCUS AREA • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• FOCUS CHECK ADJUSTMENT
• AF MODE • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • SUB MONITOR MODE
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• AF RANGE LIMITER • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE Shortcuts

• FOCUS CHECK LOCK • NATURAL LIVE VIEW

• MF ASSIST ON/OFF • HISTOGRAM
• SELF-TIMER • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• AE BKT SETTING • LARGE INDICATORS MODE 10
• FOCUS BKT SETTING • F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• PHOTOMETRY • COMMAND DIAL LOCK
• SHUTTER TYPE • AE LOCK ONLY
• FLICKER REDUCTION • AF LOCK ONLY
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING • AE/AF LOCK

387
 • AF-ON • Bluetooth ON/OFF
• AWB LOCK ONLY • QUICK MENU
• LOCK SETTING • PLAYBACK
• PERFORMANCE • NONE
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts

10

388
 Function Controls

AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.

MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-
ed flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the
flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).

TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 175).

RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING

Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been as-
signed can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
position C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button a
second time restores the previous settings.

Shortcuts

10

389
 Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

Touch-Function Gesture Defaults

The default assignments for the different gestures are:

Touch-Function Gestures Default

A T-Fn1 (flick up) HISTOGRAM
B T-Fn2 (flick left) FILM SIMULATION
C T-Fn3 (flick right) WHITE BALANCE
Shortcuts

D T-Fn4 (flick down) SHUTTER TYPE

10

390
 Function Controls

Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures

The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected us-
ing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.
• IMAGE SIZE • ISO
• IMAGE QUALITY • IS MODE
• RAW • 35mm FORMAT MODE
• FILM SIMULATION • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• GRAIN EFFECT • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • TTL-LOCK
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • MODELING FLASH
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • HIGH SPEED REC
• DYNAMIC RANGE • F SELF-TIMER
• D RANGE PRIORITY • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• WHITE BALANCE • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
• CLARITY • F IS MODE BOOST
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • ZEBRA SETTING
• FOCUS AREA • COOLING FAN SETTING
• FOCUS CHECK • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• AF MODE ADJUSTMENT
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • SUB MONITOR MODE
• AF RANGE LIMITER • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL Shortcuts

• MF ASSIST ON/OFF MODE

• SELF-TIMER • NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• AE BKT SETTING • HISTOGRAM
• FOCUS BKT SETTING • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH 10
• PHOTOMETRY • LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• SHUTTER TYPE • F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• FLICKER REDUCTION • COMMAND DIAL LOCK
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING • LOCK SETTING

391
 Function Controls

• PERFORMANCE • QUICK MENU

• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER • PLAYBACK
• Bluetooth ON/OFF • NONE
N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
Shortcuts

10

392
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories

393
 Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.

Lens Parts
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Lens hood F Aperture ring

B Mounting marks G Lens signal contacts
C Focus ring H Front lens cap
D Aperture ring lock release I Rear lens cap
E Mounting marks (focal length)
N A GF63mmF2.8 R WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

11

394
 Lenses

Lens Care
• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.

O Lens caps may differ from those shown.

Attaching Lens Hoods

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front
lens element.

11

395
 Lenses

Aperture Rings
In modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual), you can choose
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the lens aperture ring.

Aperture ring Aperture ring

lock release
Setting Description
With the aperture ring in the C or A position, you can choose
C( )
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the camera command
A( ) dial.
Other values ( ) Set aperture to the selected value.

N To select C or A, or to select another value after selecting C or A, press the

aperture ring lock release while rotating the aperture ring.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

T/S Lenses
View the shift amount or rotate amount
of lenses on the EVF or LCD (P 25).
The shift and rotate amounts are dis-
played in increments of 0.5 mm and 3°,
respectively.

N The shift amount and rotate amount are also recorded to the EXIF data
of images that have been taken.

11

396
 Viewfinder Tilt Adapters
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the view-
finder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90°.

A Hot shoe E Connectors

B Tilt lock knob F Connector cover
C Adapter lock release G Hot shoe cover
D Horizontal swivel lock

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

397
 Attaching the EVF-TL1
Slide the EVF-TL1 onto the camera hot
shoe and then attach the EVF-GFX3 elec-
tronic viewfinder.

N Remove the hot shoe covers from the camera and EVF-TL1 before at-
taching the adapter and viewfinder.
Removing the EVF-TL1
Remove the viewfinder and then, keeping the
lock releases (A) pressed, press down on the
front of the adapter (B) and slide it from the
camera as shown.

O Use only one tilt adapter at a time.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

398
 Viewfinder Tilt Adapters

Using the EVF-TL1

Swivel the viewfinder into the desired position.

Swiveling the Viewfinder Up or Down

Loosen the tilt lock knob and swivel the
viewfinder up or down from 0° to 90°.

With the viewfinder in the desired posi-

tion (A), tighten the tilt lock knob (B)
to lock the viewfinder in place.

Swiveling the Viewfinder Left or Right

Release the horizontal swivel lock as

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

shown and swivel the viewfinder left or
right ±45°.

With the viewfinder in the desired po-

sition (A), return the horizontal swivel
lock to the latched position (B) to lock
the viewfinder in place.

11

399
 External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless flash control.
O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for ex-
ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.

Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected
for F FLASH SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING >
FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye re-
moval minimizes “red-eye” caused when light from the flash is reflected
from the subject’s retinas.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

400
 External Flash Units

Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.
2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FLASH SETTING

FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

RED EYE REMOVAL
SETTING) menu tab. The options TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
available vary with the flash unit. COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING

EXIT

Menu Description P
Displayed when no compatible flash unit is connected or
SYNC
if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only 402
TERMINAL
the X-contact on the hot shoe.
SHOE MOUNT Displayed when an optional flash unit is mounted on the
403
FLASH hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional flash unit functioning as a com-
COMMANDER
mander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control is 406
(OPTICAL)
connected and turned on.

N SYNC TERMINAL will be also displayed if an incompatible flash

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

unit or no flash unit is connected.

3 Highlight items using the focus stick MODE

SHOE MOUNT FLASH
(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-
mand dial to change the highlighted
setting.

ADJUST END

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.

11

401
 SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL

ADJUST END

Setting Description
Choose from the following options:
• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
A Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after

the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Sync it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.

11

402
 External Flash Units

SHOE MOUNT FLASH

The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST END

Setting Description
The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-
able vary with the flash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

• MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash
units will fire multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be
turned off from the camera.

11

403
 Setting Description
The options available vary with flash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceed-
ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-
ed value is added to the value selected with the flash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only).
output
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
C Flash mode (TTL) flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.

11

404
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shut-
ter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
D Sync • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
Note: Horizontal bands may appear in pictures taken using
AUTO FP(HSS) at some shutter speeds.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that sup-
port flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
E Zoom made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
F Lighting • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-
raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
G LED light as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-
light and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
G Number of flashes * shutter is released in MULTI mode.
H Frequency * Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded.
11

405
 COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)

ADJUST END

Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice of

four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote flash units. Sepa-
rate channels can be used for different flash systems or to pre-
vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode

and flash level adjusted separately for C
each group. A

11

406
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
A Flash control mode • TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash com-
(group A)
pensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percent-
age of the other and adjust overall flash compensation
B Flash control mode for both groups.
(group B)
• M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
C Flash control mode in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire
(group C) multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fire.
Adjust flash level for the selected group according to
D Flash compensation/
output (group A) option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control
E Flash compensation/ system are exceeded.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

output (group B) • TTL: Adjust flash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust flash output.
F Flash compensation/ • TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
output (group C) adjust overall flash compensation.

11

407
 Setting Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-
lected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo
is taken.
G Flash mode (TTL) • F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possi-
ble; flash level is adjusted according to subject bright-
ness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

shutter closes.
H Sync • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that sup-
port flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
I Zoom made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-
11 ducing coverage.
J Lighting • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.

408
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a command-
er for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-
on flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless remote
flash control.
K Commander • Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not affect the final picture.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
K Number of flashes shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-
nication with the remote flash units. Separate channels
L Channel can be used for different flash systems or to prevent in-
terference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI
L Frequency mode.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

409
 Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip can be used to sup-
plement the camera battery or when holding the camera
rotated to take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.

A Fn1 button N Serial number plate

B Fn2 button O Hanging hook
C Fn3 button P Compartment for connector cover
D Shutter button supplied with camera
E Control lock Q AFON button
F Front command dial R Rear command dial
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

G Fn5 button S Focus stick (focus lever)

H Fn6 button T Q (quick menu) button
I Lock screw knob U AEL (exposure lock) button
J Tripod socket V Indicator lamps
K Eyelet for camera strap W Battery tray
L Connector cover X Battery-chamber cover latch
M Lock screw Y Connector
N All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.

11

410
 Vertical Battery Grips

Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip

N Check that the camera is off before attaching or removing the vertical
battery grip.

1 Remove the connector cover.

Remove the vertical battery grip connector cover from the
camera (A) and the connector cover from the vertical battery
grip (B).
(A) (B)

N The vertical battery grip connector cover of the camera (A) can
be placed in the compartment for the connector cover. Store the
connector cover of the vertical battery grip (B) so that is not lost
after removal.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Attach the vertical battery grip to the camera.
While hooking the hanging hook in the hole to hook vertical
battery grip on the camera (A), attach the vertical battery
grip to the camera (B).
Hanging hook

Hole to hook Vertical Battery 11

Grip

411
 3 Rotate the lock screw knob to secure the vertical battery grip.

O • Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
• Do not touch the contacts.
• After removing the grip, replace the vertical battery grip connector
cover (A) and connector cover (B).
• The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-
try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that the
battery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

412
 Vertical Battery Grips

Inserting and Removing Batteries

Insert the batteries as shown.

The batteries can be removed as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N • Be sure the camera is off before exchanging batteries.
• Use only NP-W235 batteries.

11

413
 Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, the
camera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries in-
serted in the VG-GFX100II.

• The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.

• When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-GFX100II, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A The left grip battery (L)
B The right grip battery (R)
C The camera battery
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

414
 Vertical Battery Grips

Charging the Batteries

The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached to
a camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, the
lamp on the right the status of the right
battery.

Indicator lamp Battery status

On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Battery fault

O • All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about

330 minutes.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

• Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45 W or above
reduces charging times to as little as 180 minutes.
• The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
• For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 50) and “The
Battery and Power Supply” (P 430).

11

415
 Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.

Attaching a Cooling Fan

Open the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.
O Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the fan.
1 Open the monitor.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

2 Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the

fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)
in a safe place.

(A)
(B)

11 (A)

416
 Cooling Fans

3 Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws and
connectors are correctly aligned.

4 Tighten the screws.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N The cooling fan may fall off if the screws are not sufficiently tightened.

11

417
 Cooling Fans

Using the Fan

Fan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING >
xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING >
xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan off.
O • At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies re-
corded with the camera.
• Depending on the LCD orientation, the EVF turns off, and the LCD
only turns on.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

418
Technical Notes

419
 Accessories from Fujifilm
The following accessories are available from Fujifilm. For the
latest information on the accessories available in your re-
gion, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be pur-
chased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
FUJINON lenses
GF-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM G-mount.
Vertical battery grips
VG-GFX100II: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 410).
Tilt adapters
EVF-TL1: This adapter lets you swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or
down between 0° and 90° to take shots from different angles.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfinder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfinder window.
Mount adapters
H MOUNT ADAPTER G: This mount adapter allows the camera to be used with SUPER EBC
FUJINON accessories for the GX645AF, giving you the use of one additional telecon-
verter and nine different lenses.
Technical Notes

Macro extension tubes

MCEX-18G WR/MCEX-45G WR: Mount this adapter between the lens and the camera
body for macro photography with large reproduction ratios.
View camera adapters
VIEW CAMERA ADAPTER G: This adapter is for use with lenses for older FUJINON large-for-
12 mat cameras, including lenses in the CM FUJINON series.

420
 Accessories from Fujifilm

Shoe-mounted flash units

EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifilm optical wireless flash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote flash unit for remote wireless
flash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 flash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote flash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-
mander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless flash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on flash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-42: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL flash control (manual flash control is not supported).
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 416).
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time
exposure. The RR-100 has a connector with a diameter of 2.5 mm; a third-party
⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter is required for connection to the camera.
Technical Notes

Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.

12

421
 Accessories from Fujifilm

Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip.
Body caps
BCP-002: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax film.
Technical Notes

12

422
 Software and Services for Use with Your
Camera
The camera can be used with the following software and
services. For the latest information on software available
from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.

Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-
sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-
ex-powered-by-silkypix/
N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-
powered-by-silkypix/
Technical Notes

12

423
 Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-
er formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.

Capture One for Fujifilm

Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pic-
tures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)

A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroom-
tether-plugin/
FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
Technical Notes

https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/

12

424
 Software and Services for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO

When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/

FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner

Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 121).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/

Frame.io Camera to Cloud

Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the
Frame.io platform via a network.
https://frame.io/

Technical Notes

12

425
 For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
• Read Instructions
Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
should be read before the appliance is operated. so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
• Retain Instructions
Instructions: The safety and operating instructions items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-
should be retained for future reference. tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
• Heed Warnings
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the where they exit from the appliance.
operating instructions should be adhered to. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
• Follow Instructions
Instructions: All operating and use instructions cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
should be followed. fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
Installation damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
from the type of power source indicated on the marking la- with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com- use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-
pany. For video products intended to operate from battery turer.
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. An appliance and cart combination
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped should be moved with care. Quick
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having stops, excessive force, and uneven
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the surfaces may cause the appliance and
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are cart combination to overturn.
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electri-
cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Antennas
purpose of the polarized plug. Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re- the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-
of the grounding type plug. ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. electrode.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod- PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
Ground Clamp Antenna Lead
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
in Wire
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface. AAnntenna
This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal- Electric Servicee Equipmentt Discharge Unit
D
Technical Notes

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is (NEC

N SECTION
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad- 8
810-20)
hered to. This video product should never be placed near or Ground Clamps
over a radiator or heat register. Grounding
Power Service Grounding Electrode Conductors (NEC
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
System (NEC ART 250. PART H) SECTION 810-21)
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-
ter—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
12 or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.

426
 For Your Safety

Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service person-
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. video product.
Use • If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-
this video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore
a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
Lightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
ified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Service Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualified service personnel.

Be sure to read these notes before use

Safety Notes The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-
resent the following:
• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. AC
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. DC
About the Icons Class II equipment (The construction of the product
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate is double-insulated.)
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is WARNING
used incorrectly as a result.
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the
This icon indicates that death or serious in- battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
This icon indicates that personal injury or
Unplug it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
from power
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fire or
CAUTION material damage can result if the informa-
Technical Notes

socket
tion is ignored. electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.

The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
instructions which are to be observed. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
Triangular icons tell you that this information re- water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
quires attention (“Important”). Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, discon-
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”). nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a
fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
12
action that must be performed (“Required”).

427
 WARNING WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with your
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This eyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with clean
Do not use in can cause a fire or electric shock. water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
the bathroom
or shower number right away.
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev- Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution those specified here. The supplied charger is for use
Do not
disassemble
can cause fire or electric shock. only with batteries of the type supplied with the
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob- batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
serve this precaution could result in electric shock can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re- Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
Do not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-
parts injury or electric shock, and take the product to the tographing infants and young children.
point of purchase for consultation. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec- Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec- product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and Failure to observe this precaution could result in
cause a fire or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-
contact your Fujifilm dealer. Do not use cables with longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when
bent connectors. HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This or with users who suffer from poor circulation or
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
injury. similar precautions are recommended.

Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explo-
use shooting, playback, or any other operations sive gases, or dust.
of the camera while operating a car or other ve- When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
hicle. This can result in you falling down or being or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
involved in a traffic accident. If you take pictures keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
while walking, pay attention to your surroundings. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due battery to ignite or burst.
to induced current from the lightning discharge. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load the out of the reach of small children. Children may
battery as shown by the indicator. swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not attention or call emergency.
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other ments that could cause injury are the strap, which
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re- could become entangled about a child’s neck,
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re- causing strangulation, and the flash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Technical Notes

charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do

not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
Failure to observe these precautions could result This product generates radio-frequency emissions
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or that could interfere with navigational or medical
leaking, causing fire, burns, or other injury. equipment.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified for
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fire.
12

428
 For Your Safety

CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fire
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-
tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fire.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-
caution could result in fire or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fire or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fire.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it and
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
Technical Notes

note that this service is not free of charge.

Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
tions.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like. 12

429
 The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read L Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections. • Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-
WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
such as sunshine, fire or the like. • Do not expose to flame or heat.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •
Do not disassemble or modify.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
cause leakage, overheating, fire, or explosion. • Use with designated chargers only.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries • Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery. • Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to the
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. touch after extended use. This is normal.
L Notes on the Battery L Caution: Disposal

The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Charge the battery one or two days before use. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
not in use. Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adapters
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-
insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices. • Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
L Charging the Battery • Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
L Battery Life

A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will

hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-
vice life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
Technical Notes

charge. Charge the battery regularly.

L Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-
mately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-
move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
12 not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.

430
 For Your Safety

Using the Camera

• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Trademark Information
including artificial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor. registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
• Strong sunlight focused through the viewfinder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-
age the panel of electronic viewfinder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewfinder at the sun. Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shots
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera to
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either regis-
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States
liability for damages or lost profits incurred as a result of
and/or other countries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and
product malfunction.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Notes on Copyright Alliance®. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways such marks by Fujifilm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPO-
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images RATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is a trademark or regis-
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. tered trademark of Atomos. All other trade names mentioned
in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Handling
their respective owners.
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are Electrical Interference
being recorded. This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
Liquid Crystal
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action Color Television Systems
indicated should any of the following situations arise: NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-
• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the vision telecasting specification adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
running water. television system adopted mainly in European countries and
• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, flush the affected eye with China.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
assistance.
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera file format in which
• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-
with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-
or reproduction during printing.
iting, then seek medical assistance.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Technical Notes

high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and ware without the permission of the applicable governing
images recorded with the product are unaffected. bodies is prohibited.
Lenses and Other Accessories
• Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujifilm will not be held liable for performance issues or
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.

12

431
 NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE ernment’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Government.
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
(2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. power level in all tested frequency bands.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant this product must be used with a Fujifilm-specified fer-
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro- rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and the product you have purchased. Please call
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
interference to radio communications. However, there is no recycle this battery.
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
vision 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
ficiency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
1609
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and re-
ceiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-
Technical Notes

junction with any other antenna or transmitter.

12

432
 For Your Safety

For Customers in Canada Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana- Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
dian ICES-003. the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus- packaging indicates that this product shall not
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the be treated as household waste. Instead it should
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in- be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
terference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, electrical and electronic equipment.
including interference that may cause undesired operation By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
of the device. help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op- vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientific evi- as household waste.
dence does not show that any health problems are asso-
ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are mulators please dispose these separately according to your
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels local requirements.
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health sources. For more detailed information about recycling this
effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does product, please contact your local city office, your household
not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not product.
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
that some biological effects might occur, but such findings Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
have not been confirmed by additional research. GFX100 II the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-
has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation ex- thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. that they are to be disposed of separately.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-
nel mobile satellite systems.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
• very humid or extremely dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration
Technical Notes

• exposed to strong magnetic fields, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
• next to rubber or vinyl products

12

433
 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF230001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 11.81 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 13.51 dBm
Bluetooth: 3.20 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than offered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifilm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-
tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
• following may be punishable by law:
The
Technical Notes

- Disassembly or modification or this device

- Removal of device certification labels
• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-
ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confirm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the affected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
12 this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifilm representative.

434
 For Your Safety

• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information

SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.119 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.

U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifilm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany

Technical Notes

12

435
 For Your Safety

Be sure to read these notes before using the lens

Safety Notes WARNING
• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
serve this precaution can cause a fire or electric
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. Do not
shock.
immerse
About the Icons
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate to observe this precaution can cause fire, electric
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in- Do not
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
disassemble
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
This icon indicates that death or serious serve this precaution could result in electric shock
WARNING injury can result if the information is ig- or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
Do not touch
nored. internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the informa- point of purchase for consultation.
tion is ignored. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the fall, causing injury.
instructions which are to be observed. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
Triangular icons tell you that this information re- finders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
quires attention (“Important”). permanent visual impairment.

Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the

action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fire
or burns.
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
Technical Notes

store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the

lens can cause fire or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-
jects, causing injury.

12

436
 Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-
tly with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-
age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.

Technical Notes

12

437
 Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-
scribed below.
O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.

1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove

dust from the sensor.
N Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.

2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-

peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.

3 Replace the body cap or lens.

Technical Notes

12

438
 Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

Checking the Firmware Version

O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card is
inserted.

1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.

2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The

current firmware version will be displayed; check the firm-
ware version.

3 Turn the camera off.

N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional acces-
sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.

Technical Notes

12

439
 Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, con-
tact your local Fujifilm distributor.

Power and Battery

Problem Solution
• The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before first use
(P 50).
The camera does not
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
turn on.
• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-
entation (P 43).
• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 43).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
The monitor does not
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
turn on.
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-
mediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly. • ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 152).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 336).
Technical Notes

12

440
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
The camera turns off The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
suddenly. fully-charged spare battery (P 50).
The camera does not The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
turn off. (P 10).
• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 50).
• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
AC power adapter (P 50).
Charging does not start.
• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 43).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 43).
Charging does not start • Confirm that the camera is connected to the computer
(USB). (P 53).
• If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-
ble (P 53).
• Insert the battery.
Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
(battery charger). • The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature. Technical Notes

12

441
 Problem Solution
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 43).
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
does not charge.
it with a new battery (P 336). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifilm dealer (P 420).
The power supply icon is Confirm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is se-
not displayed. lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.

Menus and Displays

Problem Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 58, 335).
Technical Notes

12

442
 Troubleshooting

Shooting
Problem Solution
• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 45, 224).
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 332).
• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
No picture is taken
when the shutter
• The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 45).
button is pressed.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 54).
• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 360).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
appears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder when
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
the shutter button is
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaffected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or man-
The camera does not ual focus (P 110).
focus. • The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 99).
Technical Notes

12

443
 Problem Solution
• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153).
• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occu-
pies a larger area of the frame (P 153).
No face is detected. • The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-
ject to face the camera (P 153).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 153).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 155).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 155).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 174).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170).
The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 8).
Technical Notes

12

444
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject in
range of the flash.
The flash does not fully
light the subject.
• The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 78, 82, 464).
• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
Pictures are blurred. (P 61).
• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-
played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 62).
• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel
mapping (P 142).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-
ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
Pictures are mottled. the occurrence of such bright spots.

• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 54,
456).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 54, 456).

Technical Notes

12

445
 Playback
Problem Solution
The pictures were taken with a different make or model of
Pictures are grainy.
camera.
Playback zoom is The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a different
unavailable. make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 341).
No sound in movie • The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
playback. during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted. Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 228).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-
File numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the bat-
unexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 369).
Technical Notes

12

446
 Troubleshooting

Wired Connections
Problem Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 64).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewfinder. Use
monitor are blank. the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 20).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 64).
No picture or sound • Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV. (P 64).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-
vision to adjust the volume (P 64).
The computer does not Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
recognize the camera. (P 255).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO Check camera settings. If the camera is connected via
or FUJIFILM X Acquire USB, be sure 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
fails to correctly detect is chosen for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
the camera. (P 291, 292).
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
Cannot connect to
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
iPhones or iPads.
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 254).
Confirm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
Cannot connect to
for connecting the camera varies with the type of connec-
smartphone.
tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252).
Technical Notes

12

447
 Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-
tions, visit:
https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
Problem Solution
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
The camera is slow
• The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer
(P 247).
to connect or upload
pictures to the
• Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-
era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-
smartphone.
less phones (P 247).
Upload fails or is
interrupted.
• The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-
phone and camera can connect to only one device at a
time. End the connection and try again (P 247).
• There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make
Cannot upload images. connection difficult (P 247).
• The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
• The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in
formats they do not support.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING >
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
Smartphone will not
increases upload times for larger images; in addition,
display pictures.
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 322).
Technical Notes

12

448
 Troubleshooting

Remote Movie Recording

Problem Solution
• The IP address is incorrect: Enter the correct IP address.
Note that the IP address may change unexpectedly if au-
tomatic IP address assignment is enabled (P 293).
• The access point for the computer or tablet is not configured
correctly: Be sure the access point for the computer or
The remote recording
tablet is configured correctly (P 293).
display does not appear
in the browser. • The camera is not on the same network as the computer or tab-
let: Be sure the camera is connected to the same local-ar-
ea network (LAN) as the computer or tablet (P 293).
• The camera clock is not set to the correct date: Set the camera
clock to the correct date (day, month, and year).
• Delete the browser history and/or cache.
• The connection is not high speed: Be sure both the camera
and the computer or tablet are connected to the network
The browser is slow
via Ethernet or high-speed (e.g., 5 GHz) wireless.
to update the view
through the camera • The browser is configured to prioritize image quality over per-
formance: Select real-time performance for “Display with
lens.
Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority” in
the browser remote recording menu (P 309).

Technical Notes

12

449
 Problem Solution
The browser does not
display the same menus Automatic translation is enabled in the browser: Disable auto-
or other text as the matic translation.
camera.
• The camera root certificate has not been installed on the com-
puter or tablet: Install the camera root certificate on the
The computer or tablet
computer or tablet (P 298).
cannot connect to the
camera via HTTPS. • The camera IP address has changed: The camera root certifi-
cate must be reinstalled on the computer or tablet each
time the camera’s IP address changes.
The computer or
Root certificates for some cameras have not been installed on
tablet cannot connect
the computer or tablet: Install root certificates for all cameras
to multiple cameras via
(P 298).
HTTPS.
• SERVER TYPE has not been set to HTTPS: Set SERVER TYPE
to HTTPS and import a root certificate.
A second or subsequent
camera cannot be • Camera 1 is not selected in the “Choose camera” area: Select
Camera 1 in the “Choose camera” area, and then connect
connected from a QR
and use the second or subsequent camera.
code.
• The browser is not allowed to access the tablet’s camera: Allow
the tablet’s browser to access the camera.
Technical Notes

12

450
 Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous
Problem Solution
• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 43).
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
The camera is unre- ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
sponsive. • The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connec-
tion.
• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
to unlock the controls (P 17, 19).
The camera does not Remove and reinsert the battery (P 43). If the problem
function as expected. persists, contact your Fujifilm dealer.
No sound. Adjust the volume (P 338).
Pressing the Q button
does not display the TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 175).
quick menu.

Technical Notes

12

451
 Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
i (red)
spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-
j (blinks red)
ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-
s (displayed in red with
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
red focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the flash for additional light-
speed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
Technical Notes

12

452
 Warning Messages and Displays

Warning Description
Turn the camera off, remove the lens, and check for for-
eign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
LENS ERROR
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-
mat the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
CARD ERROR
message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-
sists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
PROTECTED CARD The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
BUSY
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
b MEMORY FULL Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.

Technical Notes

12

453
 Warning Description
• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
WRITE ERROR space.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording mov-
ies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
FRAME NO. FULL select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
Technical Notes

12

454
 Warning Messages and Displays

Warning Description
• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The file
cannot be viewed.
READ ERROR
• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected
PROTECTED FRAME
picture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
DPOF FILE ERROR any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-
ry card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.

Technical Notes

12

455
 Warning Messages and Displays

Warning Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
m CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a different model of camera.
p (yellow) The camera is approaching the maximum temperature al-
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
STANDARD OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
TEMPERATURE LIMIT camera off and wait for it to cool.
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPER-
burns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
p (red) The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
HIGH TEMPERATURE the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the cam-
LIMIT REACHED era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pic-
SHUTTING DOWN tures taken when this warning is displayed.
Technical Notes

12

456
 Errors
If a C or B icon appears in the display, select INFORMATION >
ERROR DESCRIPTION in the network/USB setting menu to
view the error and then take the appropriate action.
Error Solution
NOT CONNECTED TO
The wired LAN (Ethernet) cable is not connected: Connect the
NETWORK VIA ETHERNET
wired LAN (Ethernet) cable.
CABLE
• No connection to access point: Confirm that the access point
is on, verify its settings and IP address, and check that
there are no obstructions blocking its signal. If necessary,
NOT CONNECTED TO
move the camera closer to the access point.
NETWORK VIA WIRELESS
LAN • Camera settings have not been correctly adjusted for connec-
tion to the access point: Check that the password, encryp-
tion type, and SSID match those chosen for the access
point.
IP ADDRESS CANNOT
BE ASSIGNED BY DHCP • No DHCP server: If there is no DHCP server on the network,
SERVER OR THERE IS AN enter the IP address and other information manually.
ISSUE WITH IP ADDRESS • The DHCP server is down: Contact the network administra-
SETTING PLEASE CHECK tor.
SETTINGS

Technical Notes

12

457
 Error Solution
• Duplicate IP address: Change the camera IP address to en-
sure that it does not duplicate the address of any other
device on the network.
• Invalid IP address: If the network includes a DHCP server,
select auto address allocation. If IP addresses are assigned
CANNOT REACH FTP
manually, check that the IP address is correct.
SERVER OR COMMUNI-
CATE WITH FTP SERVER • The DNS server address is incorrect: If you configured the
DNS address manually, be sure the information you en-
PLEASE CHECK SETTINGS
tered is correct.
• FTP server settings are incorrect: Check that the server type,
server address, port number, and proxy settings are cor-
rect.
• The FTP server is down: Contact the network administrator.
LOGIN TO FTP SERVER Incorrect user name or password: Check that you have sup-
HAS FAILED plied the correct user name and password.
CANNOT TRANSFER • FTP server permissions are configured incorrectly: Check that
you have write access to the FTP server.
OR SAVE FILES TO FTP
SERVER • The FTP server is full: Check the amount of free storage
space remaining on the FTP server.
The root certificate has expired: After confirming that the
CA ROOT CERTIFICATE IS
camera clock is set to the correct time and date, load an
INVALID
updated CA root certificate.
Technical Notes

12

458
 Errors

Error Solution
• The Frame.io server may be down: Check that the Frame.io
server is up or try again later.
• The camera clock is not set to the correct time and date: Set the
camera clock.
Frame.io DISCONNECTED
• The network is not configured correctly: Check the settings of
the connected network.
• Turn the camera off and then on again.
• Contact the network administrator.
UNEXPECTED ERROR HAS • Turn the camera off and then on again.
OCCURRED • Contact the network administrator.

Technical Notes

12

459
 Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at different image sizes. All figures are
approximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, pro-
ducing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity SD/CFexpress memory cards
64 GB
T SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL
O 4∶3 1040 1560 2490
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) 300
Photos
RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) 590
RAW (COMPRESSED) 880
V2160 79 minutes
Movies *
W1080 79 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.

O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 72).
• Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacity
of 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple files without interruption.
The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit
rate and memory card capacity.
Technical Notes

12

460
 Specifications
System
Model FUJIFILM GFX100 II
Product Number FF230001
Effective pixels Approx. 102 million
Image sensor 43.8 mm × 32.9 mm Bayer array with primary color filter
Storage media Fujifilm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards
Memory card slots • SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1
• CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1
File system • Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compli-
ant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes
• Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four chan-
nels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
Technical Notes

12

461
 System
Image size O 4∶3 (11648 × 8736) O 65∶24 (11648 × 4304)
O 3∶2 (11648 × 7768) O 5∶4 (10928 × 8736)
O 16∶9 (11648 × 6552) O 7∶6 (10192 × 8736)
O 1∶1 (8736 × 8736)
P 4∶3 (8256 × 6192) P 65∶24 (8256 × 3048)
P 3∶2 (8256 × 5504) P 5∶4 (7744 × 6192)
P 16∶9 (8256 × 4640) P 7∶6 (7232 × 6192)
P 1∶1 (6192 × 6192)
Q 4∶3 (4000 × 3000) Q 65∶24 (4000 × 1480)
Q 3∶2 (4000 × 2664) Q 5∶4 (3744 × 3000)
Q 16∶9 (4000 × 2248) Q 7∶6 (3504 × 3000)
Q 1∶1 (2992 × 2992)
RAW (11808 × 8754) TIFF (11648 × 8736)
Lens mount FUJIFILM G mount
Sensitivity • Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 80–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 40, 25600, 51200, or 102400
• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 100–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-
alent to ISO 25600
Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Technical Notes

12

462
 Specifications

System
Shutter speed • MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ¼ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ¼ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC,
E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
O The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may
differ from those listed here.
Continuous Available frame advance rates (JPEG)
CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL ELECTRONIC
MODE SHUTTER SHUTTER
CH HIGH SPEED BURST 8.0, 5.0 5.3 *
CL LOW SPEED BURST 2.0
* In 35mm FORMAT MODE, the frame rate is 8.7 or 5.8
O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
Focus • Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balance Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-
light, shade, daylight fluorescent, warm white fluorescent,
cool white fluorescent, incandescent, underwater
Technical Notes

Self-timer • Still pictures: Off, 2 sec., 10 sec.

• Movies: Off, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash mode • MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-
speed sync)
12
• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
463
 System
Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL flash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ⁄ s
Sync contact X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄ s
Sync terminal Provided
Electronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfinder (supplied)
(EVF)
LCD monitor • Rear monitor: 3.2-in/8.1 cm, 2360k-dot color LCD touch
screen with 3-way tilt
• Shoulder monitor: 2.09-in/5.31 cm, 219 × 320-dot memory
LCD monitor
Movies • Movie size: 7 2.76:1, 2 1.38:1, V 16:9, 6 17:9,
(with stereo sound) 5 2.35:1, 4 17:9, 3 3:2, 3 16:9, V 16∶9, 1 17∶9,
W 16∶9, W 17∶9
O The size that can be selected depend on the
IMAGE FORMAT setting.
• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
• Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 120P, 100P
Technical Notes

12

464
 Specifications

Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Remote release connector ⌀3.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps
HDMI output HDMI connector (Type A)
LAN connector 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T

Technical Notes

12

465
 Power supply/other
Power supply NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life • Battery type: NP-W235
• Lens: GF63mmF2.8 R WR
• External flash units: Disabled
• Shooting mode: Mode P
• AUTO POWER SAVE: ON
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE LCD EVF
BOOST 1 Approx. 500 Approx. 370
NORMAL Approx. 540 Approx. 460
Number of shots (VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCE LCD EVF
1
BOOST Approx. 1360 Approx. 1010
NORMAL Approx. 1470 Approx. 1240
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
Continuance
Actual battery life battery life of
Mode of movie capture movie capture
V2 Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 80 minutes
V3 Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 90 minutes
W3 Approx. 80 minutes Approx. 140 minutes
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 65 minutes –
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected PERFORMANCE.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.
Technical Notes

CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera

and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the figures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-
ance will decline at low temperatures.

12

466
 Specifications

Power supply/other
Camera size 152.4 mm × 117.4 mm × 98.6 mm (46.5 mm excluding projections,
(W × H × D) measured at thinnest part)/6.00 in. × 4.62 in. × 3.88 in. (1.83 in.)
Camera weight Approx. 949 g/33.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight Approx. 1030 g/36.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia
(center frequency) : 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
Technical Notes

(center frequency)

12

467
 EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfinder
Type OLED
Size 0.64-in/1.63 cm
Pixel count Approximately 9.44 million dots
Magnification 1.00× with 50 mm lens (35 mm format) at infinity and diop-
ter set to −1.0 m−1
Diagonal angle of Approximately 47° (horizontal angle of view approximately 38°)
view
Diopter adjustment −5 to +2 m−1
Eye point Approximately 21 mm
Dimensions 52 mm × 37 mm × 78.9 mm/2.05 in. × 1.46 in. × 3.1 in.
(W × H × D)
Weight Approx. 91 g/3.2 oz.
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 2350 mAh
Rating capacity 2200 mAh
Operating 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
Dimensions 38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
(W × H × D) 1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
Weight Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
Technical Notes

12

468
 Specifications

AC-5VJ AC power adapter

Manufacturer Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
Address No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Model name AC-5VJ
Rated input 100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input capacity Max. 50 VA
Rated output DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
Average active efficiency 84.8 %
Efficiency at load 10% 84.2 %
No-load power consumption 0.02 W
Operating temperature 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Weight Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.

O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.

Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in this
manual.

Technical Notes

12

469
MEMO

470
MEMO

471
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com